Loading...
SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 HVAC RENOVATIONS - 16-0023-PR-D• • SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 HVAC RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO. 16 -0023 -PR -D CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for CLEARWATER BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH BIDDING PHASE AUGUST 2017 • • 0 City of Clearwater, Florida Spectrum Field Phase 2 HVAC Renovations Project No. 16 -0023 -PR -D SECTION I SECTION II SECTION III SECTION IV SECTION IVa APPENDIX SECTION V TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL CONDITIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL ENGINEER TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS GRINER - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS GRINER - MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS GRINER - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTS PRE QUALIFICATION APPLICATION ASBESTOS SURVEY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer COVER Page H Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION 1 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 - HVAC RENOVATIONS Documents and plans for Project # 16 -0023 -PR -D are available at www.myclearwater.com/bid. The work includes: removing and replacing various HV/AC systems, associated thermostats, pumps and addition of 2 new split system; throughout Spectrum Field Stadium and miscellaneous HV/AC works. Pre -Bid Conference: August 29, 2017 at 10:00 AM Spectrum Field — 601 Old Coachman Rd., Clearwater Florida 33765 — Media Room — meet at Administrative Office for Directions to Media Room Pre -qualification DEADLINE: [Insert Date] Category: Heating Ventilations & Air Conditioning Prequalification Amount $250,000 Bids DUE: Thursday, September 21, 2017 1:30 PM City of Clearwater, Project #16 -0023 -PR -D Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756-5520 Issued by: Alyce Benge, Purchasing Manager SECTION 1 Page 1 Updated 4/7/2017 ` SECTION II • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents SECTION II i INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS i 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6. CONTRACT TIME 3 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15. OPENING OF BIDS 5 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19. BID PROTEST 7 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 SECTION II i Updated 7/13/2017 • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater website at address: www.myclearwater.com/bid. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the DVC Marketing Plan Room, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non- refundable. Bidding Documents may include, but aren't limited to, plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form and Addendums. 1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub -bidders or others. 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre -qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, fmancial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application package for pre -qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. Pre -qualification requirement information is also available on the City of Clearwater Website at address: www.myclearwater.com/government/city-departments/engineering/construction- management. Contractors wanting to pre -qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre -qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre -qualification status before a Bid Opening. 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. SECTION II Page 1 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre-bid meeting agenda, prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. SECTION II Page 2 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. 5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening. 5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida. 6. CONTRACT TIME 6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V. 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder SECTION II Page 3 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be accepted. 11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one SECTION II Page 4 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders and two), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form. 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non -Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15. OPENING OF BIDS 15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SECTION II Page 5 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 s r SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. SECTION 11 Page 6 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5. The successful bidder/contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. •19. BID PROTEST 19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST: SECTION II Page 7 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2. PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3. PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4. STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. SECTION 11 Page 8 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction -related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction -related Best Management Practices. SECTION II Page 9 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 • SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1. DEFINITIONS 1 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6 3.1. INTENT 6 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL • CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 7 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE10 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE 10 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE10 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 . 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 SECTION III i Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • 6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8. PERMITS 16 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10. EMERGENCIES 17 6.11. DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 23 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 23 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24 7. OTHER WORK 25 O 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25 7.2. COORDINATION 25 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 26 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION26 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 27 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR • ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33 SECTION III ii Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions S 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD 34 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 36 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 38 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 39 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 • 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41 17. MISCELLANEOUS 41 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41 17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 42 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS 42 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42 19. MATERIAL USED 42 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 43 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43 . 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 44 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 22.1. GENERAL 44 SECTION III iii Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • 22.2. EXAMPLE 46 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 46 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 46 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 46 23.3. FIXED SIGN 47 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 47 23.5. SIGN COLORING 47 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 47 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 47 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 48 • • 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 48 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 49 SECTION III iv Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions • 1. DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. • Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the SECTION III Page 1 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions • Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. • Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. SECTION III Page 2 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III —General Conditions Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. ED. O. T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. S Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 3 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 111—General Conditions • Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre -construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the • Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. SECTION III Page 4 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court. SECTION III Page 5 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. • 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal Discharge Construction Site Training. 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1. INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be SECTION III Page 6 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 7 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. • 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per SECTION III Page 8 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 111—General Conditions • hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one- hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. • 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any sub- contractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City, sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the right to review the Contractor's deductible or self-insured retention and to require that it be reduced or eliminated. Specifically the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the termination or expiration of this Agreement: The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess liability policies. 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises operations, products/completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate. SECTION III Page 9 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non -owned, hired or borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) combined single limit. • 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where applicable. Coverage must be applicable to employees, contractors, subcontractors, and volunteers, if any. 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE Professional Liability/Malpractice/Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence. If a claims made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims made coverage, unless prior policy was extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims made coverage. 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment—Inland Marine Insurance and/or Property Insurance on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care, custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) equipment or property. 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as the project proceeds. 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS • Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s) of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD SECTION III Page 10 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition when requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or delivered is as follows: City of Clearwater Engineering Department Attn: Construction Office Specialist P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 1. The Description (of Operations/Locations/Vehicles) should specify Project Name and Project Number. 2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal, termination, material change or reduction in coverage. 3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non-contributory coverage for Contractor's negligence. 4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense, for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor providing its defense as contemplated herein. The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) obligation to provide the insurance coverage specified. 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub -contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting SECTION III Page 11 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION 111— General Conditions from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good SECTION III Page 12 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3-1508 regarding noise restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all day Sunday. Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute SECTION III Page 13 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5. USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any SECTION III Page 14 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III —General Conditions such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed. 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities shall be repaired or replaced "in-kind" within forty-eight (48) hours to minimize the loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought. • Sod must be restored "in-kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. SECTION III Page 15 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions • 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS • Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E -Verify System to verify employment eligibility. • 6.8. PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. SECTION III Page 16 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions • 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there • is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. • 6.10. EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or SECTION III Page 17 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION 111— General Conditions the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11. DRAWINGS 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of SECTION III Page 18 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION 1I1— General Conditions construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals, per the approved initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay SECTION III Page 19 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III —General Conditions request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1. General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J-17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also known as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. • 6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall SECTION III Page 20 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III —General Conditions prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6. Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J-17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7. Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. III 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1. Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1. Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2. Laver Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk SECTION III Page 21 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III —General Conditions WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2. Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3. Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text times the plot scale. • Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22. height of .010 times the plot scale. height of .008 5°, and a text SECTION III Page 22 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all drawings. Requested file formats are: Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahony@myClearwater.com. • • 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non -execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City, its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands, claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys', witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, SECTION III Page 23 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III —General Conditions or resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii) any negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii) Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established by this Agreement. Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this indemnification. The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor -provided supplies or services. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties. 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. . 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS The ENGINEER will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: a) b) c) d) Keep and maintain public records required by the city of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as many be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. SECTION III Page 24 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III —General Conditions e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. 7. OTHER WORK 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2. COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be • identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. SECTION 111 Page 25 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. SECTION III Page 26 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. • • 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. SECTION III Page 27 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III —General Conditions When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. SECTION I11 Page 28 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III —General Conditions Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: • changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; • provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by SECTION 111 Page 29 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III —General Conditions a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full -unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 410 It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances SECTION III Page 30 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract SECTION III Page 31 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III —General Conditions Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, SECTION III Page 32 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by SECTION III Page 33 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). • • 13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if SECTION III Page 34 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • 1 SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have SECTION III Page 35 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's SECTION III Page 36 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III —General Conditions Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. SECTION III Page 37 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the Contract Documents. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. • 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE • If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as SECTION III Page 38 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. • 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE • Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and SECTION III Page 39 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract SECTION III Page 40 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III—General Conditions • Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17. MISCELLANEOUS 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2. GIVING NOTICE 411 Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. • 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. SECTION III Page 41 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions • 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. • 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562-4923 or email: Michael.Pryor@myClearwater.com. 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19. MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation. 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner -purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales SECTION III Page 42 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III —General Conditions tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value and/or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment and materials for consideration as ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and/or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor. The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non -conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the SECTION III Page 43 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated damages. 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage -repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be paid for by the Contractor. 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1. GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by SECTION 111 Page 44 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions • the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. • • SECTION III Page 45 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III—General Conditions 22.2. EXAMPLE CITY LOGO of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, SCOPE OF WORK. • 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined SECTION III Page 46 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions • after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3. FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2 -inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24 -inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24 -inches by 30 -inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5. SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other • lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager/City Representative shall provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor. • 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SECTION III Page 47 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • SECTION III — General Conditions 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN <PROJECT NAME> <CONTRACT NUMBER> <DEPARTMENT NAME> PROJECT N CONTRACTOR. COMPLETION DATE - FUNDING. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. CLEARWATER BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY ISD BEACH 2' minimum height 4"x4" P.T. Post (Typ.) 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay SECTION III Page 48 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION I11— General Conditions • the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. • • 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case-by-case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. SECTION III Page 49 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. See Section V of the Contract for Certification Form to be executed and submitted with the • Bid/Proposal Form. SECTION III Page 50 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Content: 100 SERIES: GENERAL 1 101. SCOPE OF WORK 1 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 6 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 6 102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 7 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 7 103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 7 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC 7 105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 8 105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 8 105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 8 105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 8 105-4. EQUIPMENT 8 • 105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 8 105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 9 105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 9 105-8. LIGHTING 9 105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 9 105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX 9 105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE 10 105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 10 106. STREET SIGNS 10 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 10 107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 10 107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 10 107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 11 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 12 107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 12 107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 12 107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 13 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 13 108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 13 108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 13 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 14 O 109-1. WEB PAGES DESIGN 14 109-2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 14 109-3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 14 SECTION IV i Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications • 109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS 15 109-5. INTERACTIVE FORMS 15 109-6. POSTING 15 109-7. WEB PAGES UPDATES 15 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 16 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 16 202. OBSTRUCTIONS 17 203. DEWATERING 17 203-1. GENERAL 17 203-2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 17 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 18 204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 18 204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 18 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 18 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 19 206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 19 206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 19 207-1. GENERAL 19 S 207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 19 207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 20 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 20 207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 20 207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 20 207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 20 207-8. MAINTENANCE 20 207-9. COMPLIANCE 21 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. 21 208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 21 208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 21 208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 21 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 21 208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 22 208-6. RIP -RAP 22 208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 22 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 23 301. CONCRETE 23 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 23 302-1. EXCAVATION 23 . 302-2. FORMS 23 303. REINFORCEMENT 23 SECTION IV ii Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications • 303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 24 304. BACKFILL 24 304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 24 304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 24 305. RIPRAP 25 305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 25 305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 26 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 27 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 27 401-1. BUILT UP TYPE 27 401-2. PRECAST TYPE 27 401-3. DROP MANHOLES 28 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS 28 401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS 28 401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 28 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 28 402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 28 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 29 403-1. MATERIALS 29 403-2. INSTALLATION 29 • 403-3. TESTING 30 403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 31 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 31 404-1. INTENT 31 404-2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 31 404-3. MATERIALS 31 404-4. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION 32 404-5. TELEVISION INSPECTION 33 404-6. LINER INSTALLATION 34 404-7. LATERAL RECONNECTION 34 404-8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 34 404-9. PAYMENT 34 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 35 405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT 35 405-2. PAYMENT 35 405-3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 35 405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 36 405-5. INFILTRATION CONTROL 37 405-6. GROUTING MIX 37 405-7. LINER MIX 37 405-8. WATER 38 0 405-9. OTHER MATERIALS 38 405-10. EQUIPMENT 38 405-11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 39 SECTION IV iii Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 405-12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 40 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 46 501. SCOPE 46 502. MATERIALS 46 502-1. GENERAL 46 502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 46 502-3. GATE VALVES 48 502-4. VALVE BOXES 49 502-5. HYDRANTS 49 502-6. SERVICE SADDLES 50 502-7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 50 502-8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 51 502-9. TAPPING SLEEVES 51 502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 51 503. CONSTRUCTION 52 503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 52 503-2. PIPE LAYING 52 503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 53 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 54 • 504. TESTS 55 504-1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS 55 504-2. NOTICE OF TEST 55 505. STERILIZATION 55 505-1. STERILIZING AGENT 55 505-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 55 505-3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 55 505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 56 505-5. BACTERIAL TESTS 56 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 56 506-1. GENERAL 56 506-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 57 506-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 57 506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 506-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 57 57 59 59 59 602. UNDERDRAINS 59 0 602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 59 602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 60 SECTION IV iv Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications !' 603. STORM SEWERS 60 603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 60 603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 61 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 61 604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 61 604-2. PRECAST TYPE 62 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 62 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 62 605-1. MATERIAL 62 605-2. PERFORMANCE 63 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 65 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 65 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 65 702-1. BASE 65 702-2. SUBGRADE 67 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 68 703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 68 0 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 68 703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 69 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 69 703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 69 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 69 703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 70 703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 70 703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 71 703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 71 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 71 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 72 705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 72 705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 72 706. CONCRETE CURBS 72 706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 72 706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 73 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 73 707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 73 707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 73 707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 73 IP 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 73 707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 74 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 74 SECTION IV v Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications • 708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 74 708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 74 708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 75 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 75 708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 75 708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 75 708-7. TYPES OF MILLING 75 708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 75 708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 76 708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 76 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 77 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 77 801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 77 802. SIGNING AND MARKING 77 802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 78 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 78 803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 78 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 79 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 79 0 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 79 902-1. IRRIGATION 79 902-2. LANDSCAPE 89 903. SODDING 104 904. SEEDING 104 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 104 905-1. SCOPE 104 905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 105 905-3. WORK METHODS 105 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 107 907. COMPLETION OF WORK 108 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 108 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 108 910. TREE PROTECTION 108 910-1. TREE BARRICADES 108 910-2. ROOT PRUNING 109 910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 110 • SECTION IV vi Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 100 SERIES: GENERAL • 101. SCOPE OF WORK Project Name: SPECTRUM FIELD (SF) HVAC RENOVATIONS Project Number: 16 -0023 -PR -D SCOPE OF WORK: 1. The intent in this Spectrum Field Phase 2 — HVAC Renovations is to replace all HVAC units as shown on the contract documents and specifications found in Section IVa as base bid item. 2. All Bidders shall be Pre -qualified in Heating Ventilation & Air Conditioning two weeks prior to bid opening date. Prequalification minimum amount is $250,000.00. Pre -qualification application is included in this contract document under Appendix. 3. 10% bid bond is required and a performance surety bond is also required for this project see detailed information in this contract document. 4. The prospective bidders shall agree to hold his bid prices for ninety (90) days from bid opening date. 5. The word Contractor shall mean the same as HVAC Mechanical contractor and shall perform all work as shown in these contract documents and shall retain other sub -contractors if necessary to perform this work. 6. The Contractor shall note that the Owner and the Philadelphia Phillies shall continue daily operations of the Spectrum Field during the HVAC Renovations and the Contractor shall minimize disruption of daily operational business activities. 7. Contractor's lay down area shall be located in the south parking lot of Spectrum Field and exact location shall be provided at the pre -construction meeting. 8. The Owner has submitted for Building Permit application and the Contractor shall collect the Building Permit from the City of Clearwater Building Dept. There shall be no fee required for the Contractor to collect the building permit. The Building Permit No. is BCP2017-07661. The Contractor shall call in for all inspections as required at the correct intervals for City Inspector observe the work performed and sign of as the project progresses. The Contractor shall be required to close out the building permit and obtain a Certificate of Completion. Provide the Building Permit and Certificate of Completion originals to the Owner in the Operation & Maintenance Manual (O&M Manual). SECTION IV Page 1 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 9. The intent to award contract by City Council shall be the Council Meeting of October 16, 2017. Contractor shall collect the contract and execute signing the contract. Notice to proceed will be given at time of pre -construction meeting. Projected start date for project is October 30, 2017. Contractor shall be on site performing the work within 7 days from Notice to Proceed. Contract duration is 100 Consecutive Calendar Days from notice to proceed. Completion of the work shall be on or about, February 07, 2018 depending on notice to proceed. 10. The Surety Performance Bond shall be recorded at the Pinellas County Court House and the original shall be returned to the City for finalization of the contract. 11. The Owner shall develop a request to requisition and formally submit for Purchase Order based on the amount of contract approved by City Council and submitted on Friday, October 20, 2017 and the Contractor shall receive the purchase order the following week. 12. The Owner has provide asbestos survey of the work performed by Greenfield Environmental and is attached in the contract documents upon notice the Contractor intent to award the BHF — HVAC Renovations the Contractor shall be required to submit to Pinellas County Air Quality 10 day notice prior to being work at the project site. Fee for this notice is paid by the Contractor and a line item is included in the bill of quantities. 13. Pre -construction meeting prior to award of contract (October 2017, exact date to be determined). At this meeting the contractor will provide the following: a. Schedule of Values to be utilized for progress payments. Final copy of Payment Schedule in the 0 & M Manual. b. Detailed progress schedule shall be submitted at the pre construction meeting and updated for each progress meeting and long lead items shown on the schedule. Final Schedule in the 0 & M Manual. c. Material submittals & Shop Drawings — list of materials to be provided to the Engineer for approval prior to purchasing. All Material & Shop Drawing Submittals in the 0 & M Manual. d. Discussion of project closeout procedures. 3 hard copies of 0 & M Manual shall be provided to the Owner in a three ring binder and separate tabs shall separate each section and shall include HVAC units warranty and extended 5 year warranty shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. e. Owner to provide updated events schedule. f. Owner to provide electric and water. g. Contractor to provide employee sanitation (shall not use public restrooms). h. The schedule is to be discussed at project progress meetings and shall be held every two week at an agreed day and time. Discussion items a the meetings as follows: SECTION IV Page 2 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications i. Work completed the past two (2) weeks. ii. Work scheduled next two (2) weeks. iii. Issues of concern. (Questions and answers.) iv. Updated schedule. v. Draft pay request and submission of invoice. 14. Quality Assurance: a. The contractor's field superintendent is to review the project documents in total, and subsequently meet with the engineer prior to starting the work to address any questions relevant to the project requirements. b. Contractor shall provide all barricades, as necessary to protect the structure and safety of the residents, visitors, and workers at all times. c. Contractor staging to be determined at the pre -construction meeting. 15. Owner will provide a Clerk -of -the -Works for coordination of daily activities within the facility, and confirmation of unit price quantities, along with other duties as required by the owner. 16. The contractor's superintendent will be required to maintain a daily log on-site identifying the number of workers, work activity, change in weather conditions, etc. 17. Payment for work performed. a. The Contractor shall submit pay application on the 25th of each month for work performed the previous 30 days. b. A pencil draft of the pay application shall be provided to the Engineer and Owner at one of the progress meeting for review. Upon approval the Contractor shall submit an electronic pay application for approval and upon approval by the Engineer shall send electronic copy to the Owner for payment. c. Payment of request for payment shall be made within 30 days from date of invoice and payment shall be made to the Contractor's mailing address. No check will be provided by hand delivering and only delivery by U. S. Postal Service. d. Final payment shall be made as stipulated in the contract documents. e. 10% retainage of total project cost shall be retained by the Owner until the following schedule of items are completed: i. 5% retainage may be requested upon: 1. Substantial completion of the project: a. Close out of Building Permit Final b. Obtain Certificate of Completion c. Preliminary walk through by Engineer & Owner d. Punch list has been provided to the Contractor to perform punch list ii. Remaining 5% retainage may be request upon: SECTION IV Page 3 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 1. Punch list items are completed and request for final walk through by the Owner and Engineer and approval punch list items are completed. 2. 0 & M Manual has been reviewed and approved by Engineer, turned over to the Owner 3. 3 Hard Copies of the 0 & M Manual with divider tabs of each section 4. 1 Hard copy set of red lined As Built drawings 5. 3 electronic CD's of files in the 0 & M Manual and As built drawings 18. Deliverable at Close Out of Project: a. Red Line 'As -Built' drawings shall be provided to the Owner. The Contractor shall obtain a clean set of drawings from the Owner. The clean set of drawings the Contractor shall red line and changes to the work performed. 19. Care shall be taken during demolition as the contractor shall be responsible to restore any damage and return to preconstruction conditions. This includes ceiling and walls. 20. Remove and reinstall ceiling tiles and ceiling grid as necessary. Damaged material shall be replaced in kind. 21. Site shall be clean of any construction debris daily and disposed of at the end of day in a proper disposal container in the Contractors lay down area. No construction debris or contractor's employee trash shall be on site at the end of the work day. At carpeted area the Contractor shall vacuum these areas to prevent tracking construction dust into other parts of carpeted areas of the facility. 22. Contractor lunch & break area shall be at a designated location on site to be determined at re -construction meeting.. The Contractor and his employees shall keep the area tidy at all time and no food/wrappers/containers shall be left in open view and be disposed of in a proper trash container and disposed in the Contractor's lay down area. No food containers, bottles/cups/drinking containers shall be left in the BHF facility at the end of the work day. 23. Disconnect and reconnect electrical service to heat pump/air handler. 24. Remove and replace hose kit with new. 25.AI1 existing duct work to remain and be undisturbed except at connections to HVAC units being replaced. 26. Remove and replace with new balancing valves and strainers. SECTION IV Page 4 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 27. Provide miscellaneous items as required to provide a complete operational system. 28. Remove & replace water source heat pumps and split systems as shown on drawings. 29. Thermostats shall be replaced in-kind. Wall patching and painting shall be responsibility of the Contractor. 30. The Contractor shall dispose of the HVAC unit at proper disposal facilities and maintain records of disposal for future references if required by other governing agencies. 31. Removal and replacement of any roof units: Contractor shall remove and provide new roofing curbs roof patching as necessary with similar type materials and have a qualified Roofing Contractor to perform patches from leaking. 32. The Contractor shall contact City of Clearwater Solid Waste for roll off containers if required for this project. City of Clearwater Zoning Ordinance requires the use of city roll off containers for all public projects. • 33. Contractor shall perform test and balancing of each HVAC unit replaced and provide report to the Engineer for review and approval. Provide copies of the test and balancing report in the 0 & M Manual and electronic files on three CD's and return to the Owner at close out of the project. • 34. Coordinate exact duplex electrical outlets and equipment locations with Owner engineer prior to rough -in. 35. Electrical Contractor shall track existing circuits to turn off breakers prior to beginning work. 36. Scope of work shall include all ceiling work, including removal -replacement -reuse of ceiling tiles, lighting fixtures and/or ceiling mounted devices, temporary lighting, requirements from the AHJ required to perform any electrical work. 37. Wherever the word "Provide" is used, it shall mean "Furnish and Install Complete Operational System" 38. New branch circuits shall be minimum 2 #12 and 1#12 E.G. in 3/" conduits unless otherwise noted for HVAC work scope. 39.The Contractor shall provide 1 (One) Fixed project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs SECTION IV Page 5 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to the Contractor's schedule of work. 40. Spectrum Field Drawing Index: Sheet No. Title of Sheet Date CS Cover Sheet July 20, 2017 M101 Legend July 20, 2017 M101A Mechanical Lower Level Replacement Plan July 20, 2017 M101 B Mechanical Lower Level Replacement Plan July 20, 2017 M101C Mechanical Lower Level Replacement Plan July 20, 2017 M102 Mechanical Concourse Replacement Plan July 20, 2017 M103 Mechanical Third Floor Replacement Plan July 20, 2017 M201 Schedules July 20, 2017 M202 Schedules July 20, 2017 M301 Details July 20, 2017 Project Duration: 100 Consecutive Calendar Days 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 102-1.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. SECTION IV Page 6 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 102-1.2. LAYOUT DATA • • The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY If line and grade is supplied by the City, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article 1 - Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is referenced for the same task. Contractor shall utilize applicable FDOT Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not covered by City's Standards and Specifications. 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The SECTION IV Page 7 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 105. AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre -construction conditions. 105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio/video recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre -construction color audio/video recording documentation. 105-4. EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio/video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio/video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. SECTION IV Page 8 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications • 105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION • • All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. 105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 105-8. LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during videoing shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. SECTION IV Page 9 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 106. STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. • 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL • 107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by City Traffic Operations personnel regardless if MOT plan details are included in the contract plans. SECTION IV Page 10 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 107-2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the driver proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. Per the 2014 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 or latest revision: "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours shall be provided by appropriate signs." Per the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102-5 Traffic Control, 102-5.1 Standards, are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans. 107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season without prior approval by the City Engineer. 107-3.1. ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 107-3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. SECTION W Page 11 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 107-3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL • • COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic Division staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 107-3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 107-3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 107-3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 107-3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS 107-3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days. 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone (727) 562-4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise. SECTION IV Page 12 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty-four (24) hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty-four (24) hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de -energized and visibly grounded. Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the following table. 108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 SECTION IV Page 13 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV—Technical Specifications Over 200 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1,000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 109-1. WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 109-2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-199905051 http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 109-3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by City departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public SECTION IV Page 14 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications . Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from Public Communications. • • 109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 109-5. INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow the Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 109-6. POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different server than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 109-7. WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed, Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. SECTION IV Page 15 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 1 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify their Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City star is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench -shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6") wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. SECTION IV Page 16 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 40 202. OBSTRUCTIONS • • SECTION IV—Technical Specifications Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 203. DEWATERING 203-1. GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this Contractor may be required to divert the water to a suitable place of discharge as may be determined by the Engineer. Where possible, Contractor may contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must be submitted to the City for approval if a discharge permit is not obtained or required. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 203-2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 203-2.1. DEWATERING DISCHARGE The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance with Florida DEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62-621.300(2)(b) prior to discharging of produced groundwater into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to construction, a dewatering plan must be prepared and submitted to the City for review. It shall include site-specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and disposal methods. The City will field -inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction. SECTION IV Page 17 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes, structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-site at their expense. The limits and depths of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of cubic yards of suitable material placed is the removal, hauling and disposal of unsuitable material. 204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems, Slurry Pipe Lines and Potable Water SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines SECTION IV Page 18 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications WHITE Proposed Excavation PINK Temporary Survey Markings Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be six inch (6") x three inch (3") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be four inch (4") x two inch (2") and be placed on the curb face. 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 40 The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. • 206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 207-1. GENERAL Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices. 207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor shall provide documentation to the City prior to Notice To Proceed. Example of SECTION IV Page 19 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications training and training sign -in sheet will be provided by the City to the Contractor at the Pre - Construction Meeting. 207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation. 207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and, wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 207-8. MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. SECTION IV Page 20 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 207-9. COMPLIANCE • Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. Other beach erosion control structures, accompanied by a certified survey showing the location of the groin or other beach erosion control structure and adjoining groins or other beach erosion control structures, shall be presented to the city council for final approval. Where steps are necessary to provide access along the beach to the public, then such steps shall be shown as part of the plan for groin construction prior to issuance of the permit, and such steps shall be constructed and maintained in a safe condition at all times. 208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS Existing seawalls and revetments on natural waterbodies may be replaced with a revetment or with a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a vertical seawall in manmade waterbodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and maintains the established shoreline. 208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing from the adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. in height prior to the effective date of this article may be maintained, repaired and replaced to their current height. 208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department of environmental protection. 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the following conditions: (a) A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design. (b) The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location. SECTION IV Page 21 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications (c) The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb. (d) Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the seawall behind the new seawall is removed. (e) Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed. (f) The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line. (g) For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive, and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the original seawall slab. 208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post - construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement. 208-6. RIP -RAP On all natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than 50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel. 208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities, including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line. SECTION IV Page 22 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV—Technical Specifications 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 301. CONCRETE The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector or City a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all concrete placement. Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to: All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at twenty- eight (28) days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3") to five inches (5"), except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards (5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 302-1. EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point six inches (6") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. 302-2. FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or by written permission from Engineer. They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 303. REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete SECTION IV Page 23 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Welded wires shall be elevated by the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77 requirements. • 303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 304. BACKFILL 304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattress shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than three inches (3") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Material for backfill under Gabion mattress shall be an A-1 soil meeting AASHTO M145. Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layer not exceeding eight inches (8") in thickness and shall be compacted into place by mechanical tamping before the next layer is applied. A hydro - hammer shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12") above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable fill to achieve required density. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications. Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D filter fabric of FDOT Index 199. Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends. Where new cast -in-place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified twenty-eight (28) days compressive strength occurs. Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet (4') above the top of the pipe or culvert. The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or lump sum price for the item of the work specified. 304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION • Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Owner, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by SECTION IV Page 24 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications the Owner's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re -inspection services. Backfill under all type of impervious areas and around structures: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or ASSHTO T 180. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed bottom of pavement elevation. Backfill outside of impervious areas: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D-698 or AASHTO T-99. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed finished grade. Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at eight inch (8") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight -volume methods. If the weight -volume method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D 1556) or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D 2167). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing. Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe/culvert connecting two (2) successive structures whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Owner's Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred foot (100') section is completed. Four (4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each eight inch (8") lift. Testing which indicates that unacceptable material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the limits of the unacceptable backfill. Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable backfill, the Owner's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Owner's Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Additional testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate limits of unacceptable backfill. 305. RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the dry weight in tons. SECTION IV Page 25 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT • 1 The pay item for sand -cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand -cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. SECTION IV Page 26 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER • • 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 401-1. BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches (24"). Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches (24"). Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2") of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 401-2. PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five inches (5"). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. SECTION IV Page 27 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 401-2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 703-7, Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 401-3. DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Index 301. 401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of Sherwin Williams Targuard® Coal Tar Epoxy or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of two millimeters (2 mm). 401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor-N-Seal® or approved water stop coupling. 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT . Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. SECTION IV Page 28 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications • 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 403-1. MATERIALS 403-1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than ten feet (10') of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20'). Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in these Technical Specifications Article 501. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. ID 403-1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE • FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 403-2. INSTALLATION 403-2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8") to twelve inches (12") on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without SECTION IV Page 29 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the Contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (one half inch (1/2") diameter aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint two (2) feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 403-2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 403-3. TESTING 403-3.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5%) of the inside pipe diameter dimension shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 403-3.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. SECTION IV Page 30 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications • 403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 403-4.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 403-4.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 404-1. INTENT • It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of eight inch (8") to twelve inch (12") sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 404-2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive track record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 404-3. MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell • classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, SECTION IV Page 31 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at five (5) foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Any liner system must be approved by the Engineer prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the date for receiving bids. 404-4. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to SECTION IV Page 32 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. • • 404-5. TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital camera and recorded in DVD format as specified below. 404-5.1. VIDEO, PHOTO CAPTURE AND DATA COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MANHOLE AND PIPELINE INSPECTION This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum requirements for Video, Photo Capture and Database structure to the City. The City is currently using CUES Granite XP video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV Inspections in the same Granite XP database, photo and video capture format. The Contractor - provided TV Inspections, Database, DVDs, Photos and related files shall have the ability to direct synchronize to the City's existing Granite XP database. 404-5.2. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to Industry Standard Formats to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, DVD and/or external hard drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers. 404-5.3. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG 1, 2 or 4 format or as specified by the City. The Video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video record in real-time. The accompanying database shall support the following code systems: WRc, PACP, CUES standard, or current code system being utilized by the City. The Database and Software program (Granite XP V2.X) shall be able to import asset data from an ArcGIS (City current version) geo- database file utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer Nodes. The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related attribute information be retained as separate tables from the Inspection allowing import of existing data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore, all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects. SECTION IV Page 33 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 404-5.4. SYNCHRONIZATION • The database shall have the ability to synch assets and inspections from replicated databases. The synch process should have built-in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation. 404-6. LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 404-7. LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 404-8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 404-9. PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linear foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully SECTION IV Page 34 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. • 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 405-2. PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay item, per linear foot of liner. 405-3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 405-3.1. MATERIALS 405-3.1.1. LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The Contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 405-3.1.2. MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two (2) and three (3) parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. SECTION IV Page 35 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 405-3.1.3. GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four (4) bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. 405-3.2. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertical as possible. Pour six inches (6") of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe water tightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces". 405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2") thickness using a machine specially SECTION IV Page 36 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two (2) coat application. 405-4.1. MATERIALS 405-4.1.1. PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +1- 5 pcf • 405-5. INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 405-6. GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi. 405-7. LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty-eight (28) days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi SECTION IV Page 37 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 1111 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf • • Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Project site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one-half inch (1/2") to five-eighths inch (5/8") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than one-half inch (1/2") in length nor greater than five-eighths inch (5/8") in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 405-8. WATER Shall be clean and potable. 405-9. OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 405-10. EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete SECTION IV Page 38 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 405-11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-11.1. PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. ID5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. • 405-11.2. MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 405-11.3. SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one-half inch (1/2"). The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty-four (24) hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than one-half inch (1/2"). The SECTION IV Page 39 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 405-11.4. PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2") cubes may be prepared each day or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 405-11.5. CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 405-11.6. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty-eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60"), and ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405-12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 405-12.1. SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration. 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam -injected through wall of manhole to fill voids, and/or b. Hydrophilic gel -injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of one-half inch (1/2") SECTION IV Page 40 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of thirty (30) dry mils 405-12.2. MATERIALS 405-12.2.1. REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 410 405-12.2.2. HYDROPHILIC GROUTING • 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 405-12.2.3. WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the SECTION IV Page 41 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six (6) months. Upon completion, the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM C882 Modified 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1 x10-10 cm/sec to 7.6x10"-11 cm/sec at 100% RH at50%RH 405-12.2.4. CEMENT LINING A self -bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity — <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after twenty-four (24) hours moist curing at 68 degrees Fahrenheit. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one (1) pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch (1/2"), but no greater than two inches (2"). It will have a dark grey color. 405-12.2.5. EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of thirty (30) dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: SECTION IV Page 42 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 405-12.2.6. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE The sanitary sewer liner shall be resistant to: Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 405-12.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-12.3.1. PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client.) 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four (24) hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 405-12.3.2. PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from SECTION IV Page 43 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 405-12.3.3. STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 405-12.3.4. INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill five-eighths inch (5/8") holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 405-12.3.5. WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. • 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. • 405-12.3.6. CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (1/2") (and no more than two inches (2")) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a twenty-four (24) hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. SECTION IV Page 44 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications ID 405-12.3.7. EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least thirty (30) mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 405-12.3.8. CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 405-12.3.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for a forty eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. •405-12.3.10. WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. • SECTION IV Page 45 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES • • 501. SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. 502. MATERIALS 502-1. GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 502-2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. SECTION IV Page 46 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSUAWWA Cl 04/A21.4 80 or latest revision. Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations and for fire line installations from the main to the backflow preventer. 502-2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe four inch (4") through eight inch (8") shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than eight inch (8") shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes four inch (4") through eight inch (8") when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of four inch (4") and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated twelve (12) gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about eighteen inches (18") between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a two inch (2") PVC pipe to twelve inches (12") minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The two inch (2") PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the two inch (2") PVC pipe shall be plugged with a two inch (2") removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 502-2.3. FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from four inch (4") through sixteen inch (16") in size will be compact ductile iron cast in • accordance with ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with SECTION IV Page 47 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSUAWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSUAWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. • 502-2.4. RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 502-2.5. PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 502-3. GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be hand wheel operated with rising stems. Valves four inches (4") and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with two inch (2") square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, non -shock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch (2") diameter and smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch (3") diameter are not allowed. Gate Valves, four inch (4") to sixteen inch (16") diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSUA.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 -ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body. SECTION IV Page 48 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Gate valves larger than sixteen inches (16") shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass. 502-4. VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be three-piece valve box assemblies. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. 502-5. HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: 411 • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0 -ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately two inches (2") above the ground line. Breakaway bolts are not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and ..� corrosion due to moisture. SECTION IV Page 49 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 one and a half inch (1-1/2") pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, one quarter (1/4) turn type with 0 -ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0 - rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a six inch (6") Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a five and one quarter inch (5-1/4") valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) two and one half inch (2-1/2") hose nozzles and one (1) four and one half inch (4-1/2") pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. • 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Restrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. • 502-6. SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to four inch (4") P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on four inch (4") main shall be one and one half inch (1-1/2"). Service saddles shall be used on all two inch (2") service connections to six inch (6") and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 502-7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. SECTION IV Page 50 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. • • 502-8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, and when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customer's private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly - a device composed of two (2) single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device - a device containing a minimum of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 502-9. TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and three-quarter inch (3/4") bronze test plug. 502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. SECTION IV Page 51 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • 503. CONSTRUCTION • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 503-2. PIPE LAYING 503-2.1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of thirty inches (30") and a maximum of forty-two inches (42") below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. 503-2.2. INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe SECTION IV Page 52 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into the pipe, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of ten percent (10%) or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems, or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. 503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 503-3.1. GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 503-3.2. VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed eighteen inches (18") from the main line. SECTION IV Page 53 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 503-3.3. HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located ten feet (10') of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six inch (6") ductile iron branch controlled by an independent six inch (6") gate valve. If hydrant is placed greater than ten feet (10') from the main, an additional valve shall be installed at the hydrant and shall be included in the hydrant assembly cost. 503-3.4. ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater. SECTION IV Page 54 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 !� 504. TESTS • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 504-1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at their expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 504-2. NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative forty-eight (48) hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 505. STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 505-1. STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification O -S -602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 505-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 505-3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than twenty-four (24) hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SECTION IV Page 55 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 505-5. BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 506-1. GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joint materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SECTION IV Page 56 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 506-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 506-2.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 506-2.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation. 506-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 506-3.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSUAWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 11) 506-3.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 506-4.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 506-4.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 506-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 506-5.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Article 501-2.5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions. SECTION IV Page 57 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • 506-5.2. PAYMENT • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant completely including necessary thrust anchorage, six inch (6") pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. SECTION IV Page 58 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 600 SERIES: STORMWATER • • 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 602. UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub -surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non -degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8") in diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non -perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly -chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 901 — Course Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel. 602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8") Sub -drain in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 59 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT • • Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 603. STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions. The work under this Article shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2) The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S-1 to S-2). 4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430-4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. SECTION IV Page 60 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re-laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re-laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re- inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved. 603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for stabilization, labor and incidentals, etc.). 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Index Numbers 201 to 231. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Articles 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one half inch (1/2") of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. SECTION IV Page 61 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 604-2. PRECAST TYPE Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES • 605-1. MATERIAL 605-1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES 605-1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non -raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.106 inches. • 605-1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 '/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. SECTION IV Page 62 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. 605-1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material. 605-1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC • Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985. • 605-2. PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical SECTION IV Page 63 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12") into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses. SECTION IV Page 64 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum eight inches (8") compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus two inches (2"), if over six inches (6"), and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4") or six inches (6") thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6") thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 303 and 707). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 702-1. BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 101 "Scope of Work" of the City's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be eight inches (8") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12") compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is SECTION IV Page 65 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Technical Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. • • The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the City by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283, RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non -limited access paved shoulders, shared use paths, or other non -traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. SECTION IV Page 66 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 702-1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (112"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702-1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 702-2. SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's • Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed for the stabilized subgrade. 702-2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702-2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. SECTION IV Page 67 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS • This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 703-1.1. AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 1/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least twenty-five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition, for excesses of one-quarter inch (1/4") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. • The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. SECTION IV Page 68 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES • All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Type SP/Spec 334-1 Type FC/Spec 337-8 Type B/Spec 234-8 ATPB/287-8 703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 703-6.1. CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703-6.2. POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. • 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. SECTION IV Page 69 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. • 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. SECTION IV Page 70 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one-quarter inch (1/4") above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. • 703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT • Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than ten percent (10%) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://www.dot.state.fl.us/construction/fuel&bit/fuel&bit.shtm. For additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414-4252. SECTION IV Page 71 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. • 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six inches (6"). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street. Use Article 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as specified for the street paving. When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways. 705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted. 705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 706. CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 72 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. • 707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS • Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches (6') in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and Specifications. 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4") concrete sidewalk, six inch (6") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6") concrete driveways in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 73 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT • • Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City of Clearwater Project Representative a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all milling. 708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City SECTION IV Page 74 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the City Project Representative to schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work. 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. City -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the Owner/City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 703-7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 708-7. TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. 708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS • Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend SECTION IV Page 75 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • approximately fifty (50) to one hundred (100) feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. • • 708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. SECTION IV Page 76 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND • 1 MARKINGS 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781. 801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 802. SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. SECTION IV Page 77 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT indices mentioned above. The City's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified. 802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SECTION IV Page 78 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION • • 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's Water Reclamation Facilities, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the Water Reclamation Facilities will be coordinated at the pre -construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 902-1. IRRIGATION 902-1.1. DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 902-1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. SECTION IV Page 79 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings, containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty- four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. • a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 902-1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation of twenty-four inch (24") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. SECTION IV Page 80 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 902-1.1.3. WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater. 902-1.2. PRODUCTS 902-1.2.1. GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 902-1.2.2. PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. • 902-1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 902-1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 902-1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 902-1.2.6. GATE VALVES 902-1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2") AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve SECTION IV Page 81 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 902-1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (21/2") AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with two inch (2") square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key" shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2") square operating nut. 902-1.2.7. SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 902-1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance -pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a one inch (1") (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch (1") slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. SECTION IV Page 82 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 902-1.2.9. VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 ten inch (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 902-1.2.10. DRIP IRRIGATION 902-1.2.10.1. CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. • 902-1.2.10.2.OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be seven inch (7"). B. For on -surface or under mulch installations, six inch (6") metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed three feet (3') to five feet (5') on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. • 902-1.2.10.3. LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub -surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 902-1.2.10.4.AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE SECTION IV Page 83 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications • A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 902-1.2.10.5. PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within +/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 902-1.2.10.6. FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 902-1.2.10.7. FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. • 902-1.2.11. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER • A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each, station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. SECTION IV Page 84 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 902-1.2.12. FIELD TRANSMITTER • • A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902-1.2.13. LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902-1.3. EXECUTION 902-1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Specifications. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. SECTION IV Page 85 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 902-1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 902-1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain six inch (6") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain six inch (6") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 902-1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18") of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than one half inch (%2"). C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six inches (6") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. SECTION IV Page 86 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 902-1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non -pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 902-1.3.3. INSTALLATION 902-1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 902-1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Specifications. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 902-1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 902-1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. SECTION IV Page 87 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least twenty-four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinlder pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 902-1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineer's representative prior to installation. 902-1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than six inches (6"), nor less than four inches (4") cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with twenty-four inch (24") minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinlder zone. 902-1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. SECTION IV Page 88 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications al 902-2. LANDSCAPE • • 902-2.1. GENERAL 902-2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 902-2.1.2. SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Article. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Article shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 902-2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Article shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plans shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety SECTION IV Page 89 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Article. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call"/"Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800) 638-4097. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 902-2.1.4. SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 902-2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through their Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 902-2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C. T: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. C. W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SECTION IV Page 90 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DL4.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. • Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner 's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. • Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 902-2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 902-2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. SECTION IV Page 91 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications C. Balled and burlapped ("B & B") plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than one foot (1') diameter of ball to every one inch (1") caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than two-thirds (2/3) of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of twelve inches (12") of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within twenty-four (24) hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 902-2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS 902-2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub -grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. SECTION IV Page 92 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair damages from planting operations. 902-2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 902-2.1.8.3. UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 902-2.2. PRODUCTS 902-2.2.1. MATERIALS 902-2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 902-2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided SECTION IV Page 93 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size, quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the Landscape Architect proof of it being non -available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 902-2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than SECTION IV Page 94 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV—Technical Specifications twenty-four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 902-2.2.1.4. MULCH A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans or by the project manager. B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3") before compaction, as shown in the PLANTING DETAILS in the plans. 902-2.2.1.5. FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grasses at the rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than one-fourth (3/4) the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 902-2.2.1.6. STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over two inch (2") caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees two inch (2") caliper and under. A minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two — three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. SECTION IV Page 95 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 902-2.2.1.7. PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the City, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of one-third (1/3) peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1"). C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under one (1) gallon container size shall consist of three inches (3") of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into native soil. • • 902-2.2.1.8. SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 902-2.2.1.9. TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)') above grade. 902-2.2.1.10. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 902-2.2.1.11. PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 902-2.2.1.12. PESTICIDES SECTION IV Page 96 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. • • 902-2.3. EXECUTION 902-2.3.1. PREPARATION 902-2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 902-2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre -emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one and one half inches (1%2") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 902-2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches (3") of one-third (1/3) Florida peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. SECTION IV Page 97 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 902-2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4"). C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top four inches (4") of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. • • 902-2.3.2. INSTALLATION 902-2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 902-2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an eighteen inch (18") (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. SECTION IV Page 98 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the Plans. 902-2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about one inch (1") higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each %2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back -filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade. Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of eighteen inches (18") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. SECTION IV Page 99 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 902-2.3.2.4. SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). The ground shall be moistened before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to one inch (1") to one and one half inches (1-1/2") below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches (2") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 902-2.3.2.5. SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 902-2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by SECTION IV Page 100 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of four feet (4') height of stake above grade and a minimum of thirty inches (30") of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of five (5) layers of burlap and five (5) - 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two (2) three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of five feet (5') of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 902-2.3.2.7. MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. Mulch should be below top of curb and resistant to washout from stormwater run- off. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3") layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. • D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum three inch (3") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum six inch (6") clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum six inches (6") of non -mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. • 902-2.3.2.8. PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 902-2.3.2.9. CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 902-2.3.2.10. PROTECTION SECTION IV Page 101 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 902-2.3.2.11. REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 902-2.3.3. MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1") of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 902-2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 902-2.3.4.1. INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. SECTION IV Page 102 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 902-2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in the Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. • • 902-2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or their representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under -specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 902-2.3.5. WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. SECTION IV Page 103 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • 903. SODDING • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy-two (72) hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 904. SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 905-1. SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces SECTION IV Page 104 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified landscaped street areas including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 905-3. WORK METHODS 905-3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 905-3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 905-3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The Contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor. SECTION IV Page 105 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 905-3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK • • The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within twenty-four (24) hours after providing the service. 905-3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, consistent with the following specification: 905-3.2.3.1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation, such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 905-3.2.3.2. TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 905-3.2.3.3. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 905-3.2.4. PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 905-3.2.5. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor at their expense. SECTION IV Page 106 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 905-3.2.6. MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually three inches (3"). 905-3.2.7. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. 905-3.2.8. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 905-3.2.9. PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. • 905-3.2.10. FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility. Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. • 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven (7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no further than ten (10) calendar days apart. SECTION IV Page 107 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 907. COMPLETION OF WORK Within twenty-four (24) hours of completing work the City either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given forty-eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12) month period on plants, trees and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as they feel appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 910. TREE PROTECTION 910-1. TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species SECTION IV Page 108 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. • B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two inch (2") lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1') anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8') apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch (1") by four -inch (4") lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 910-2. ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18") from existing grade. The City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for Root Pruning issues is the Senior Landscape Architect and can be reached at (727) 562-4747, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. . C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. SECTION IV Page 109 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10") per one inch (1") of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18"). H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30%) of its foliage removed. SECTION IV Page 110 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion -tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. SECTION IV Page 111 of 111 Updated 2/11/2016 r City of Clearwater Spectrum Field Phase II • • Prepared For: City of Clearwater Florida Prepared By: Griner Engineering, Inc. 1628 First Avenue North St. Petersburg, FL 33713 Office (727) 822-2335 Fax (727) 821-3361 July 27, 2017 GEl Project No. 17071 • • • CITY OF CLEARWATER PUBLIC WORKS & EOC FACILITIES ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX Section # Section Name # of Pages DIVISION 26 260010 Basic Division 26 Requirements 1. 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 12 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 260535 Boxes and Cabinets 33 260553 Electrical Identification 42 260575 Conduit Rough -In Systems 55 262870 Motor and Circuit Disconnects 65 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 26 00 10 BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Requirements of Division 20 Section "Common Work Results, Division 21 through 28" apply to this Division. B. Work and materials shall conform to and be executed, inspected and tested in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code and with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. References to "NEC" within the Division 26 Sections shall be considered synonymous to this electrical code. C. Other codes which will apply to this installation include the current editions of: 1. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code. 2. NEMA Standards. 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workspaces. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. Underwriters Laboratories. D. Where governing codes indicate the Drawings and Specifications do not comply with the minimum requirements of applicable codes, be responsible for either notifying the Architect in writing during the bidding period of the revisions required to meet code requirements, or providing an installation which will comply with the code requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general administrative, material, and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 01: 1. Electrical product general requirements and accesses. 2. Substitutions. 3. Submittals. 4. Coordination drawings. 5. Record documents. 6. Maintenance manuals. 7. Rough -ins. 8. Electrical installations. 9. Cutting and patching. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Requirements of Division 20 Section "Common Work Results, Division 21 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 1 Page 1 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 through 28" apply to this Division. 2. Division 23 Section "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment," for factory- installed motors, controllers, accessories, and connections. 3. Coordinate with Division 21 - 28 for requirements for fully Integrated Facility Control System (IFCS) to combine building sub systems into one overall system. Provide a fully coordinated single seat interface to system operators. Utilize the existing Andover Continuum web based network. Provide complete control of building sub systems through a graphical, map -driven interface with further detail available on any sub system by clicking through a more focused graphic display for a particular system. Reference 25 0600 "Integrated Facility Control System" along with all other applicable specification sections. Submit list of existing operational systems demonstrating integration and information exchange with Andover Continuum Controls Platform. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required functions, dimensions, appearance, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. B. No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect/Engineer at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, performance, test data and warranties, and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or other work for incorporation of the substitute shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substituted is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. C. If the Architect approved any proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. This Addendum shall then be issued to all Bidders. D. Requests for substitution shall be made only by a Bidder. Requests for substitution received by the Architect from sales representative, vendors, suppliers, etc., are not acceptable. E. Refer to "Division 01" for instructions on substitutions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals." B. Submit coordination drawings for the areas specified and those areas defined as "problem" coordination areas during construction. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 2 Page 2 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1.5 • DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms regularly engaged in manufacturing factory fabricated systems and equipment whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. 1.7 WIRING AND CONTROLS A. Wiring and controls associated with equipment shall be furnished, installed and wired in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and applicable standards and codes. Provide installation instructions, locating dimensions and wiring diagrams for the other trades. Supervise the installation and start-up and test the equipment unless otherwise specified. B. Equipment Furnished by Other Divisions: Equipment specified in other divisions and requiring electrical supply shall be erected, aligned, leveled and prepared for operation. Provide required controls and accessories along with installation instructions, diagrams, dimensions and supervision of installation and start-up. Provide the required electrical rough -ins and confirm the electrical controls and accessories furnished under the specifications for the other divisions. Install those controls and accessories not located in the mechanical piping and ductwork. Provide additional electrical controls, accessories, fittings and devices not specified under the equipment but required for a finished, operating job. Make final electrical connections. Participate in the start-up and test services. 1.8 PERMIT AND INSPECTIONS A. Permits: Obtain and pay for all permits, bonds, licenses, tap -in fees, etc., required by the City, State or other authority having jurisdiction over the work, as a part of the work of the affected sections. B. Inspections: Arrange and pay for all inspections required by the above when they become due as part of the work of the sections affected. Conceal no work until approved by these governing authorities. Present the Engineer with properly signed certificate of final inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the manufacturer. Seconds, rejects, or damaged materials will be rejected. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 3 Page 3 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 B. The equipment to be provided under these Specifications shall be essentially the standard commercial grade product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer. C. The listing of a manufacturer for certain equipment and systems does not indicate acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems shall conform to the Specifications. 2.2 U.L. LISTING A. All equipment shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories (UL), or other approved agency, listing label. Acceptable alternates include: 1. Intertek Testing Service NA, Inc. (ITSNA) (formerly ETL). 2. Wherein an item of equipment is specified to be U.L. Listed, the entire assembly shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Any modifications to suit the intent of the Specifications shall be performed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and listed by U.L. B. Definitions: 1. Listed: Equipment or materials included in a list published by an organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, that maintain periodic inspection of production of listed equipment or materials, and whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets appropriate designated standards or has been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner. 2. Labeled: Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicated compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner. 2.3 LEAP YEAR SOFTWARE PROTECTION A. All software supplied with new equipment shall be warranted against leap year program failure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ROUGH -IN A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 28 for rough -in requirements. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 4 Page 4 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall -mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of Division 26 equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast -in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." 1. Submit coordination drawings indicating proposed access door locations for review per Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements." 2. Ensure access doors are sized to permit complete access for any concealed and/or inaccessible junction boxes, control and monitoring devices, elevator shaft and duct mounted fire alarm detectors and other items of equipment requiring access, maintenance, and/or operation. a. Assure access to devices per codes and local authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 5 Page 5 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1. The Architect shall control the placement of wall and ceiling mounted electrical devices, luminaires and outlets. The intent is to aesthetically locate luminaires/outlets by providing rough -in hardware, boxes and/or mounting plates, as required, when stud or furring may not be readily available for direct mounting. When drawing details are not available, consult with Architect's representative for actual placement. 2. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. Be responsible for any changes in openings and locations necessitated by the equipment installed. 3. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 4. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. 5. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured- in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 6. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 7. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect. 9. Distribution Equipment Assembly Selection: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of assembly equipment. Equipment having equal performance characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept, intended performance, or code/future extension provision clearances. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer a minimum of 10 days prior to bid. 10. Protect all equipment and materials from the elements, dirt and other damage from the time it is removed from the point of storage until final acceptance. 11. Equipment shall include the component parts thereof such as disconnect switches, motor controllers, motors, drives, and guards necessary to the satisfactory and safe operation of the equipment. 12. Installation shall include setting equipment to accurate line and grade, leveling equipment, aligning equipment components, providing and installing couplings, bolts, guards, and anchor bolts. 13. All tolerances in alignment and leveling, and the quality of workmanship for each class and stage of work shall be subject to manufacturer's installation instructions. 14. All manufacturers' finished equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall be brought to an "as new" condition by touch up or repainting. Any rust shall be completely removed and the surface primed prior to repainting. 15. Workmanship shall conform to the "Standard of Installation" published by the GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 6 Page 6 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 National Electrical Contractors Association. 16. Provide all trench and conduit excavation and backfilling required for his work inside and outside the building, including repairing of finished surfaces, all required shoring, bracing, pumping, and all protection for safety of persons and property. In addition, check the indicated elevations of the utilities entering and leaving the building. If such elevations require excavations lower than the footing levels, the Architect shall be notified of such conditions and a redesign shall be made before excavations are commenced. Make the excavations at the minimum required depths in order not to undercut the footings. 17. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from the premises when no longer required. 18. No electrical equipment, raceways or other work of any kind shall be covered up or hidden from view before it has been examined and approved. Any unsatisfactory work or materials shall be removed and corrected immediately. 19. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. 20. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 21. Coordinate installation of access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 22. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 3.5 COORDINATION WITH LOCAL ELECTRICAL AND TELECOMMUNICATION UTILITIES AND SERVICES A. Coordinate connection of electrical and telecommunication systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services and meet all of their schedules so that the electrical services proceeds in a timely and orderly fashion. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. B. Locations and details required by Division 26 for the utility rough -in shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 3.6 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS AND SUPERVISION A. Where supervision by a manufacturer is specified, follow all instructions, recommended manufacturer and specified field tests, and other recommendations of the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall supervise the installation, connection, start-up, testing, adjustment, instruction of the Owner and final tests of such equipment or system. Where two or more manufacturer's equipment are interrelated, take responsibility to coordinate their work and provide supervision. B. Have the manufacturer instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 7 Page 7 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 techniques of all equipment, systems, etc., at the time of completion of all work. C. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner prepare and submit to the Architect for review three copies of operation and maintenance (0 and M) instructions in printed form for each item of equipment or system installed in the building. Complete instructions for each system shall be assembled and bound in a brochure. Detailed contents of the 0 and M manuals are as hereinafter specified. Refer to appropriate Division 01 sections for general requirements affecting this work. 3.7 PAINTING A. Provide the prime painting of all equipment and materials furnished under Division 26 specifications, unless specifically stated otherwise. In general, all equipment except raceways and galvanized boxes that are not provided with a factory -applied final finish shall be delivered to the job site with a shop -applied prime coat of paint. Refer to Division 09 Section "Interior and Exterior Painting? 3.8 TEST AND INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the work, notify the Architect in writing, that the entire electrical installation has been examined, inspected, tested, calibrated or adjusted as specified and that it is ready for final inspection. Work to be connected prior to final inspection and also to include all of the work specified for "Manufacturers' Directions and Supervision." Include documentation of specified testing and inspection. B. Prior to each inspection, provide a written certification that each system or piece of equipment to be operated during that test has been tested and does meet design performance criteria of the Contract Documents. C. On completion of the work, obtain Certificates of Compliance, and approval or acceptance from all authorities having jurisdiction over the work, and deliver these certificates to the Architect. The work shall not be deemed to have reached a state of completion until the certificates have been delivered. 3.9 LOOSE EQUIPMENT A. Provide four keys for every different piece of electrical equipment which is equipped with a lock. B. Provide all other loose equipment specified/supplied for use with all systems. 3.10 SUBMITTALS • A. Refer to Division 01 for quantities and types of submittals. B. Required submittals shall be submitted in groups by systems. For example, all lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts and accessories shall be submitted simultaneously in one GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 8 Page 8 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 package. C. Division 26 Submittals required: 1. Batteries and battery chargers (submit with associated system). 2. Conduit fittings. 3. Contactors. 4. Disconnect switches. 5. Motor controllers. 6. Protective devices. 7. Surface raceways. 8. Wiring devices. D. Submittals submitted for other than those listed above or specifically required in the appropriate Specification Section will not be reviewed or returned. E. Contractor Certificates: 1. Contractor certification forms may be submitted in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in lieu of system shop drawing product data requirements except for the systems or products listed below: a. Protective devices. 3.11 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 01 Section "Project Coordination," to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. b. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. c. Wall and floor sleeve penetrations. d. Floor box assembly installations. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. 2. Coordination drawings shall be provided by Division 26 for the following: a. Access door locations and sizes (for installation by Division 08). b. Communication rooms. c. Electrical equipment rooms. • d. Feeder routings. e. Mechanical equipment rooms. 3. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 9 Page 9 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 4. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 5. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, luminaires, communications systems components, sprinlders, and other ceiling- mounted devices. B. Contract Document Drawing copies may be used as base for coordination drawings, then marked to depict actual equipment sizes and other requirements of coordination drawings. Those not marked will be rejected. 3.12 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate installed conditions for: 1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements. 2. Major equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 3. Contract Modifications and actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state of Florida as specified in Division 01 Section "Execution" to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. 3.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, the following requirements apply: 1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. e. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect observation of concealed Work. 2. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. 4. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 10 Page 10 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 components being patched. a. Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for definition of experienced "Installer." END OF SECTION 26 0010 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 00 10 - 11 Page 11 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid grounding of building structures and electrical and communications systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications. Types of grounding systems include the following: 1. Electrical Service and Transformer Grounding. 2. Building Grounding. 3. Equipment Room Ground Terminal Bar. 4. Electrical Equipment Grounding. 5. Surge Protective Device (SPD) Grounding. 6. Telecommunications Grounding. 7. Underground Distribution Grounding. 8. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System. B. Requirements of the following Division 26 Sections apply to this Section: 1. Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements." 2. Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3. Section "Raceways." 4. Section "Underground Ducts and Manholes." 5. Section "Electrical Identification." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product indicated. B. Submittals: Submit six (6) complete six of submittals including: 1. Schedules and Lists: Product or equipment schedules and lists. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring for grounding and bonding. Differentiate clearly intersystem bonding between communications. 3. Coordination drawings. C. Samples: 1. For verification: For each type of lug indicated. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 1 Page 12 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as -built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Ground rods. 2. Ground rings. 3. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 4. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. D. Field quality -control test reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data", include the following: 1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at ground rings based on NETA MTS and NFPA 70B. a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not. b. Include recommended testing intervals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 2 Page 13 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 D. Comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-607A — Commercial Building Grounding, Earthing and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following listed manufacturers: 1. Ground Rods: a. Burndy. b. Erico Products. c. Knight Metalcraft. d. Nehring. 2. Molded Fusion Welding Material: a. Cadweld. b. ThermOweld. 3. Ground Clamps/Connectors: a. Adalet — PLM Division; a Division of Scott Felzer. b. Anderson Corp. c. Anixter Bros., Inc. d. Burndy. e. Chance — A.B. chance Co. f. Crouse -Hinds, a Division of Cooper Industries. g. Erico Products. h. Ideal Industries, Inc. i. Joslyn Corporation. j. O-Z/Gedney Co. k. Raco, Inc. 1. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Enclosure Equipment Grounding Kits: a. Same manufacturer as box/cabinet or per 2.1 A.3. 5. Potential Equalizing Grid a. Burndy. b. Erico Products. 2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC and Electric Utility requirements. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 3 Page 14 • A. Copper 1/4 inch thick by 2-1/2 inch wide by length shown on Drawings, unless Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 2.3 WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS A. General: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated. Conductors No. 8 and larger may use green taped conductor ends. D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Bare stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed, copper wire. E. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, NEC sized AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 2. Duct -Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct -bank installation. 2.4 EQUIPMENT ROOM GROUND TERMINAL BAR • otherwise indicated, with two (2) rows of holes on 1-1/2 inch centers for 1/2 inch bolt, to receive cables from two (2) directions. 2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING EQUIPMENT A. Grounding Busbars: 1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus Bar (TMGB) - 24"W x 4"H x 1/4"D copper bus, with two (2) rows of holes on 1 inch centers for 1/4 inch bolts, to receive cables from two directions. 2. Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar (TGB) - 12"W x 4"H x 1/4"D copper bus, with two (2) rows of holes on 1 inch centers for 1/4 inch bolts, to receive cables from two directions. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer/Series — Erico; Eritechn #TMGB/#TGB Series or equal by Newton or Harger. B. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB): 1. Size TBB based on the following chart which is approximately 2kc mils per linear foot. a. Minimum of No. 6 AWG conductor TBB between TGB/TMGB and equipment, equipment racks, etc. b. Minimum of No. 2 AWG conductor TBB between TGB/TMGB and equipment, equipment racks, etc. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 4 Page 15 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 2.6 CONNECTORS • • A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure- type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. 2. Split -bolt connectors shall not be used for any application. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.7 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic -grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core. 1. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet. B. Plate Electrodes: Copper plates, minimum 0.10 inch thick, size as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Ground all equipment, furnished by this Division or by others. 1. Split -Bolt connection methods, shall not be used. B. Provide building grounding as shown on Drawings. C. Provide ground connection for electric service as shown on Drawings. D. Provide ground connection for communication/special systems services including underground, aerial, and antenna delivery systems. E. All transformer enclosures and secondary neutrals shall be separately grounded. Do not ground directly to building steel. Refer to "single line diagram" and details on Drawings. F. Make fusion welds in strict accordance with supplier's instructions. Clamp cables securely in place, independent of mold. Clean and inspect all welds. G. At least one connection shall be made between the building ground, the electrical service ground for the building, and a metallic cold water pipe ground larger than one inch trade diameter. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 5 Page 16 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 H. Provide a 3/0 AWG copper ground wire connected on building side of the water meter to the metallic water pipe using suitable pipe clamps. Also provide a similar bonding jumper around the water meter that will remain in place whether the water meter is in place or not. I. Grounding cable shall not be buried directly in concrete, but a conduit sleeve shall be provided where cable passes through concrete. J. Where ground conductors are shown on Drawings and for all feeders, the use of the metallic raceway in place of the ground conductor shall not be permitted. Provide grounding bushings at each end of all low voltage feeder raceways. Where non-metallic conduit is used, be responsible for installing a code sized ground conductor, whether indicated or not. K. All grounding conductors run inside the building shall be run within NEC sized metallic raceways with raceway grounding bushings at each end and bonding jumper to the enclosure or ground bus. Extend raceway to associated equipment enclosures and to within 6 inches of exposed ground terminal bar installations. Raceway installations shall be in accordance with Division 26 Section "Raceways." 1. Each ground conductor bus connection shall be terminated with individual compression lug and associated individual lug bolt. 2. Split -bolt connection methods shall not be used for any application. L. Welded connections may have multiple ground conductors to suit mold and may be considered "continuous." 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations. Only when a GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 6 Page 17 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 disconnect -type connection is indicated, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. 3.3 BUILDING GROUNDING INSTALLATIONS A. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart. B. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building. 1. Install tinned -copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building foundation. 3.4 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS A. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. B. Drive the ground rods to a minimum depth of ten feet, or more if necessary to reach permanent moisture. Ground rods shall be driven at least two feet away from the footing. C. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 7 Page 18 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 D. For service grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. E. All connections below grade shall be made with exothermic welds. Provide corrosion protection in acid soils. 3.5 ELECTRIC SERVICE AND TRANSFORMER GROUNDING INSTALLATIONS A. Make grounding connections electrically ahead of any overcurrent or disconnect device or tap connection such that disconnection of neutral load conductors does not interfere with or remove the system ground connection. Use separate lugs on the transformer neutral terminal for neutral and main grounding jumper when cable is used for transformer connections. B. Connect low voltage transformer grounds to common grounding electrode conductor(s) and not to building steel. C. Make all connections to the grounding electrode system accessible. 3.6 EQUIPMENT ROOM GROUND TERMINAL BAR INSTALLATION • A. Install a complete grounding electrode system with interconnecting cables and terminations at electrical and communications equipment rooms. • B. Install ground terminal bar in equipment rooms where shown on drawings. Mount bar by anchors and bolts using 1-1/2 inch long insulated spacer between bar and wall. Use a minimum of two supports 18 inch on center. Connect all grounding electrode system conductors, system enclosure ground bus, and other indicated electrode systems to the terminal bar. 1. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus. 3.7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SIGNAL GROUNDING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install a complete telecommunications grounding electrode system with room grounding buses, grounding electrodes, and interconnecting cables per ANSI/EIA/TIA- 607A. B. Install main and room ground bus bars at 18 inches AFF where indicated. Mount bus bar by anchors and bolts using 1-1/2 inch long insulated spacer between bar and plywood. Use a minimum of two supports for each bus bar. 1. Provide signal ground (TBB) homeruns from TMGB to each TGB with insulated grounding conductor in conduit per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 8 Page 19 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 a. TBB shall be routed to highest TGB in a vertical of stack telecommunications rooms. TBB sized per length to furthest TGB from TMGB. Each TGB shall be connected to TBB in each TR with a maximum 8" grounding whip with irreversible connection. 2. Lug main grounding bus to grounding electrodes with No. 1/0 grounding electrode conductor per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Provide a Bonding Conductor (BC) terminated at the TMGB and the electrical service ground bar. Size similar to a TBB. D. Provide a grounding equalizer (GE) extending from TGB to TGB every three (3) floors in the building (and at top floor). Size similar to TBB. E. Provide an exterior service entrance grounding electrode system specific to telecommunications system. 1. Install three (3) ground rods equidistant from each other (minimum of 6 feet). 2. Extend BC to TMGB from one ground rod. F. Install room terminal ground bus directly adjacent to main and room ground buses at 18 inch AFF. Tie to room ground bus with bare No. 1/0 AWG. G. Terminate metallic telecommunications pathways (conduit, sleeves, cable trays, etc.) to building steel or ground and not to telecommunication grounding bus systems on both ends. H. All exterior/underground terminations shall be made with exothermic welds. I. Measure impedance of grounding conductors upon completion and record on as - built documents. J. Size all TBB and Equipment Grounding Conductors for the following schedule: INSULATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SIZING SCHEDULE CONDUCTOR LENGTH (FEET) INSULATED CONDUCTOR SIZE (AWG) MAXIMUM AREA (CIRCULAR MILS) 13 6 26.240 21 4 41,740 26 3 52,620 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. Page 20 260526-9 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 CONDUCTOR LENGTH (FEET) INSULATED CONDUCTOR SIZE (AWG) MAXIMUM AREA (CIRCULAR MILS) 33 2 66,360 42 1 83,690 53 1/0 105,600 67 2/0 133,100 84 3/0 167,800 106 4/0 211,600 125 250 250,000 150 300 300,000 175 350 350,000 200 400 400,000 250 500 500,000 300 600 600,000 350 700 700,000 375 750 750,000 400 800 800,000 450 900 900,000 500 1000 1,000,000 625 1250 1,250,000 750 1500 1,500,000 875 1750 1,750,000 1000 2000 2,000,000 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. Page 21 26 05 26 - 10 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1. DESIGN GUIDE BASIS: A. MAXIMUM VALUE OF 0.1 OHM AT B. EACH POINT 2K CIRCULAR MILS C. NEEDED FOR EVERY FOOT NEC TABLE 8 2. MINIMUM A. EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR: 6 REQUIREMENTS: B. AWG (MIN.) TELECOMMUNICATIONS BUILDING BACKBONE (TBB: 2 AWG (MIN.) 3.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR INSTALLATIONS A. Unless indicated otherwise, form one equipment ground circuit with rigid metallic raceways (e.g. EMT, rigid steel conduit) where used. Install a bonding jumper for continuity around all fittings and terminations where the conductive raceway is made non -continuous (i.e. underground feeder non-metallic raceways). 1. Bond all grounding conductors to boxes or enclosures at each access point utilizing approved grounding kits. Do not use building steel as equipment grounding path. 2. Bond all conductive metallic piping system in each mechanical equipment room as required by NEC 250-104B utilizing approved clamps. Minimum size of conductors as required by NEC. Locate all connections where access is unrestricted for inspection. Looping of conductor from one system to another is acceptable provided the conductor is without splice and has each end of loop bonded. 3. If non-metallic raceways are used for power distribution feeders (i.e., panels, transformers, HVAC equipment), where the feeder is a single feeder and not a parallel feeder, a second insulated grounding conductors shall be provided inside the conduit (conduit size shall be adjusted accordingly), or a bare grounding conductor shall be provided strapped to the outside of the conduit. The grounding conductor shall be the same size as the grounding conductor provided inside the conduit. Terminate at grounding bushings or bus on each end. Where the feeder is a parallel feeder, a second grounding conductor shall not be required. 4. Where non-metallic raceways are used for branch circuit wiring (such as lighting, receptacles and miscellaneous equipment circuits), a second insulated grounding conductor shall be provided inside the conduit (conduit size shall be adjusted accordingly), or, a bare grounding conductor shall be provided strapped to the outside of the conduit. The grounding conductor shall be the same size as the grounding conductor provided inside the conduit. B. Provide, in the same raceway with the associated phase and/or neutral conductors, a green colored equipment ground conductor having the same type insulation and connected as described below to provide equipment ground redundancy. 1. Install a ground conductor in each raceway to augment the circuit formed by the metallic raceway system. Bond the conductor to each box or enclosure in which access is possible utilizing enclosure equipment ground kits, through metallic conduit insulated ground bushings or wedges and/or enclosure threaded GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 11 Page 22 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 grounding studs. Size conductor as specified, shown or required by Code, whichever is larger. Install a raceway grounding bushing and bonding jumper to the enclosure or contained ground bus for the following: each termination of conduits 1 inch trade size and larger at a switchboard, panelboard, or other enclosure, each location where multiple ring knockouts are damaged during conduit installation, each location where conduits are stubbed up into floor mounted enclosures; each conduit termination at a painted enclosure where paint is not removed before installation of raceway and each feeder. a. All branch circuits shall be provided with an equipment grounding conductor sized per NEC Table 250-122. This includes all lighting and power branch circuits. b. Provide a ground conductor to all light switches, receptacles, motors, light fixtures and all other branch circuit loads. c. Install a ground conductor inside all flexible raceways (e.g., flexible steel, liquid tight). Bond the conductor to the enclosure or ground bus in the nearest box or access on either side of the flexible section. Size conductor as specified, indicated, or required by Code, whichever is larger. d. Install a ground conductor in all sectional raceways with removable covers for access (e.g. plug-in strips, surface raceway systems, and wireways) unless specified otherwise. Size conductor in accordance with the NEC for the largest phase conductor size installed in raceway, or as indicated. Bond all sections of the raceway to the ground conductors. Connect all receptacle ground terminals in the raceway to the ground conductor, and make other ground connections shown on Drawings. C. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. D. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. E. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4 -by -2 -by -12 -inch (6 -by -50 -by -300 -mm) grounding bus. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 12 Page 23 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. F. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch -circuit conductors. 3.9 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD) GROUND CONDUCTOR INSTALLATIONS A. Extent transient voltage surge suppressor dissipation ground conductors to local equipment ground bus and to common grounding electrode conductors. Size conductors per (SPD) manufacturer recommendations and National Electrical Code. Refer to details on Drawings. 3.10 LABELING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed. 1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager." 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground - resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 13 Page 24 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground - rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 26 - 14 Page 25 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. B. Provide bases, inertia pads, steel supports, anchor bolts, inserts, etc., for all equipment and apparatus shown on Drawings. C. Floor -mounted electrical equipment shall be installed on 4 inch high floor doweled concrete housekeeping pads with 4 inch equipment inset all sides. Concrete shall be in accordance with referenced concrete specification section. D. Provide formed steel support channels extending from the solidly anchored to floor and ceiling slabs and mount the designated equipment thereto. E. Provide Steel Support Channels For: 1. Cable Trays. 2. Disconnect Switches. 3. Individual Motor Controllers. 4. Individual Circuit Breakers. 5. Raceways. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 29 - 1 Page 26 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements". 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 2. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: a. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. b. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. c. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. d. Equipment supports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. • B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit, a Division of Tyco. b. Line Systems. c. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries. d. ERICO International Corporation. e. GS Metals Corporation. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 29 - 2 Page 27 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 g. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. h. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural -grade, factory -formed, glass -fiber - resin channels and angles with 9/16 -inch- (14 -mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. 4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Power -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 29 - 3 Page 28 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a Division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a Division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP -58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP -58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Comply with NEC, NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. • B. Take care not to weaken concrete or penetrate waterproofing where equipment supports are on concrete construction. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 29 - 4 Page 29 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 C. Obtain prior approval for installation method of structural steel required to frame into building structural members for the support of equipment, conduit, etc. Welding shall be permitted only when approved by Engineer's field representative. D. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation. 1. Metal Decking: Nothing is to be suspended from metal roof decks (no concrete). E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel or angle iron racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices. F. In overhead spaces, boxes shall be supported independently of raceways and raceways independent of the boxes. Support boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. 1. Where bar hangers are used for boxes, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an independent approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. To clarify, box or raceway removal should not require re- supporting of the other. G. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. H. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single -bolt conduit clamps single -bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. I. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2 -inch (38 -mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NEC, NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. • B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 29 - 5 Page 30 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 2001b (90 kg). D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight - aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D 1.1/D 1.1 M, with lock washers and nuts. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. • E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. • 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Coordinate dimensions of concrete housekeeping pads with requirement for equipment supplied. B. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. C. Use 3000 -psi (20.7-MPa), 28 -day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section Cast - in -Place Concrete. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 29 - 6 Page 31 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 D. Anchor equipment to concrete base: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. ID C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. • END OF SECTION 26 05 29 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 29 - 7 Page 32 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 26 05 35 BOXES AND CABINETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cabinets, boxes and fittings for electrical installation and certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other sections. Types of products specified in this Section include: 1. Steel Device Boxes. 2. Cast Device Boxes. 3. Pull and Junction Boxes. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Requirements of Division 07 Section "Firestopping Penetrations" apply to this Section. B. Conduit -body type electrical enclosures and raceway fittings are specified in Section "Raceways." • C. Requirements of the following Division 26 Sections apply to this Section: 1. Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements." 2. Section "Raceways." 3. Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 4. Section "Electrical Identification." 5. Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." • 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Divisions 26 Requirements". 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. a. Conduit fittings. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate wall and floor box and cabinet penetration in rated walls with Division 07 firestopping installer to ensure rating is maintained. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 1 Page 33 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE • • A. UL Listing and Labeling: Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL. B. National Electrical Code Compliance: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standard 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: B. Steel Device Boxes: 1. EGS/Appleton Electric Co. 2. Midland Ross Corp. (Steel City). 3. Raco; a Hubbell Co. 4. Thomas & Betts Corporation C. Cast Device Boxes: 1. EGS/Appleton Electric Co. 2. Crouse Hinds Electrical Construction Material; Div. Of Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 4. O-Z/Gedney, a General Signal Co. D. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. O-Z/Gedney, a General Signal Co. 2. Crouse Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Appleton Electric Co. 4. Hoffman Engineering Co. 5. Lee Products. 6. Hammond Manufacturing. 7. Electromate Corporation. E. Cabinets: 1. Galvanized Sheet Steel: a. Square -D. b. Chicago Switchboard. c. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse. d. General Electric. e. Hoffman Engineering Co. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 2 Page 34 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 f. Illinois Switchboard. g. Lee Products. h. Crenlo, Inc. i. Hammond Manufacturing. j. Electromate Corporation. k. Sheet Aluminum. 1. Siemens m. Hennessy Products, Inc. n. Wiegman, a Division of Hubbell Inc. 2.2 CABINETS AND BOXES - GENERAL A. Electrical Cabinets and Boxes: Of indicated types, sizes and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. Box depth shall exceed depth of installed device by 1/4 inch. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Sheet Steel: Flat -rolled, code -gage, galvanized steel. B. Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated items. C. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware. D. Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures and Covers: Copper -free aluminum except as otherwise specified. E. Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise indicated. F. Painted Interior Finish: Where indicated, white baked enamel. G. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel for conduit hubs, with ground terminal bushings and box connectors. 2.4 STEEL DEVICE BOXES A. General: 1. Fabricate from galvanized or cadmium plated pressed sheet steel, with covers, extension, etc., as required by the installation. 2. Box depth shall exceed depth of installed device by 1/4 inch. B. Outlet, Receptacle, Device, and Junction Boxes: GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 3 Page 35 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1. 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch depth minimum, without clamps for either conduit or tubing. 2. 4-11/16 inch square by 1-1/2 inch depth minimum, without clamps for either conduit or tubing. 2.5 CAST DEVICE BOXES A. General: 1. Copper -free aluminum or malleable iron with matching cast cover. B. Switch Boxes: 1. FS or FD series, single, two, multi -gang as required for wiring device arrangement. C. Outlet, Receptacle, Device, and Junction Boxes: 1. FD series, single, two, multi -gang as required for wiring device arrangement. 2.6 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. General: 1. NEMA type and size as required by area or as shown, complete with matching cover. Where necessary, gaskets shall be used to prevent entrance of moisture. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: 1. Minimum 14 gauge, solder or braze all seams, roll edges at openings and bolt on covers. C. Cast Iron: 1. Corrosion resistant, hot -dip galvanized and bolt on cast cover utilizing stainless steel screws. D. Cast Aluminum: 1. Non -rusting, non -sparking, non-magnetic and bolt on cast cover utilizing stainless steel screws. E. Cast Bronze: 1. Non -rusting, non -sparking, non-magnetic and bolt on cast cover utilizing brass screws. 2.7 CABINETS A. Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes." B. General: NEMA type and size as required by area, application, or as shown. Cabinet shall consist of a box and a front consisting of a one piece frame and hinged door. Hinged side shall be dependent upon physical application. Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed around the inside edge of the frame, with a uniformly close fit between GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 4 Page 36 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24 inches apart, to hold fronts to cabinet boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 24 inches apart and not over 6 inches from top and bottom of door. Louvers for cabinet ventilation shall be provided as required by application. For flush cabinets, make the front approximately 3/4 inch larger than the box all around. For surface mounted cabinets make front same height and width as box. C. Doors: Double doors for cabinets wider than 24 inches. Cabinets wider than 48 inches may have sliding or removable doors. D. Locks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same system keyed alike. Locks may be omitted on signal, power and lighting cabinets located within wire closets and mechanical -electrical rooms. Locks shall be of a type to permit doors to latch closed without locking. Latch shall be padlocking type for exterior applications. E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Minimum 14 gauge, solder or braze all seams, roll edges at openings and minimum 12 gauge doors to match panelboard enclosures. F. Sheet Aluminum: Minimum .125 inch 5052-H32 sheet aluminum thickness, welded seams, gasketed weathertight door, weather -resistant hinge, and weather -resistant padlockable latching mechanism. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Provide grounding kits and/or stabs for each box and cabinet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation conditions. B. Maintain the environmental rating of the enclosures. Install in the openings only listed or recognized conduit hubs or control devices with the same integrity as the enclosure, in compliance with the installation instructions of the device. 1. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs. 2. Use listed enclosure conduit connectors to maintain raceway to enclosure ground integrity. Cut through paint as applicable. Cutting slots shall not be acceptable for conduit entries into enclosures. C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 1. Fasten boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 5 Page 37 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 raceways. D. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes indicated. E. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel. F. Refinish and paint enclosures in field due to any field modifications. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Furnish electrical identification as indicated in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." B. Cabinets: Flush mounted, NEMA enclosure type 1 except as otherwise indicated. C. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following requirements. 1. Interior Dry Locations: NEMA type 1, sheet steel or nonmetallic as permitted by local code. 2. Interior Dry Locations: Sheet steel, NEMA type 1. 3. Interior Dry Locations: Nonmetallic, NEMA type 1. 4. Interior Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal, NEMA type 3. 5. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal, NEMA type 3R. 6. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Molded PVC or glass fiber reinforced plastic, NEMA type 3. 7. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Molded PVC or glass fiber reinforced plastic, NEMA type 3R. 8. Wet Locations: NEMA type 4 enclosures. 9. Corrosive Locations: NEMA type 4X enclosures. 10. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: NEMA type listed and labeled for the location and class of hazard indicated. D. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location except as otherwise indicated. E. Floor Boxes: In slabs on grade and wet locations use cast iron (or non-metallic) boxes. At other locations in slabs, use concrete -tight stamped steel boxes. 1. When non-metallic is used, assure ground continuity to wiring devices and for through box branch circuits. 2. Coordinate plate assemblies for applicable floor construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BOXES A. Size all boxes as required by the National Electrical Code with oversize boxes as shown GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 6 Page 38 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 on Drawings. Obtain special backboxes with associated equipment when available. B. Provide where required for outlet facility and rough -in requirements. Securely support from building construction with rods or bar hangers independent of raceways. Provide backing extension for all steel device boxes in stud walls or support box on two opposite sides such that cover plate and drywall is not stressed to hold box in position. C. Give priority in available space to large steam mains, steam lines that pitch, waste lines, drain lines, large air duct, and all structural steel, unless shown otherwise. 1. Minimum Spacing: 3 inches between boxes and cold water or waste piping and 6 inches between boxes and parallel steam pipes, condensate pipes, hot water pipes and air ducts. 2. Do not support from ceiling supporting system, mechanical system supports or mechanical systems. 3. Do not penetrate or anchor into mechanical ductwork. D. Install recessed except where shown or specified surface mounted. E. Maintain accessibility to all boxes. Z -spline ceilings are considered not accessible. F. Size and install so no part is visible and is completely covered by wall plate or fixture. G. Do not cut insulation in walls to install boxes. H. Do not use through -the -wall boxes. I. Recessed boxes shall not be installed back to back. J. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. K. In each instance where two or more device boxes are generally located in the same vicinity and at the same mounting height, mount those devices in a common multi -gang barriered box as appropriate for the device types. 1. Maintain box and raceway separations per NEC. Pullbox barriers will not be acceptable except for special cases brought to the engineer's attention prior to installation. L. In each instance where two or more device boxes are generally located in the same vicinity and at different elevations, mount the boxes vertically on a common center line. M. Install in center of glazed tile, brick, block or other masonry wall material with square cornered tile or masonry extension rings of proper depth. N. Install outlet boxes in sheet rock walls with square cornered tile or masonry rings of proper depth. Standard drywall rings will not be acceptable. Maintain NEC required tolerances. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 7 Page 39 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 O. Close off all unused openings with proper fittings. P. Install outlet boxes for electric water coolers concealed inside cooler cabinet. Locate outlet boxes using rough -in template furnished with cooler. Q. Combination devices (i.e. switch and receptacle) installed in minimum 2 gang box under common wall plate. R. Provide box and cabinet barriers to segregate voltages 300 volts and greater and to segregate normal and emergency distribution system branches. S. Set floor boxes level at height to match trim with flooring type. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. All boxes shall be concealed and accessible after completion of building. B. Installation in finished spaces requiring access panels is prohibited except where specifically shown or directed. • 3.5 BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.6 BOX COVERS A. Provide appropriate screw cover for all boxes dependent upon type and application. B. Provide spannerhead screws for exposed covers in psychiatric and high security areas. 3.7 BOX APPLICATION A. Exterior walls shall not be considered interior dry locations for recessed exterior devices. Sheet steel boxes shall not be used. B. Galvanized steel boxes may be used in: 1. Concealed interior locations above ceilings and in hollow studded partitions. 2. Exposed interior location above seven feet. 3. Direct contact with concrete except slab on grade. 4. Stud walls of kitchens and laundries. C. Cast boxes shall be used in: 1. Exterior locations. 2. Hazardous locations. 3. Within seven feet area around boilers, incinerators and other heat producing GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 8 Page 40 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 equipment. 4. Exposed interior locations within seven feet of the floor. 5. Direct contact with earth. 6. Direct contact with concrete in slab on grade. 7. Wet locations. 8. Kitchens and laundries except in stud walls. D. Sectional Boxes: 1. Shall not be used in any application. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS A. Support securely independent from building construction and align with adjacent equipment. Top shall be 6 foot - 2 inches to top of trim. 3.9 GROUNDING A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a grounding conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure. • 3.10 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks. • B. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc -rich paint recommended by the tray manufacturer. C. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating. END OF SECTION 26 05 35 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 35 - 9 Page 41 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for raceway and cable. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground -line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. B. Requirements of the following Division 09 Sections apply to this Section: 1. Section "Interior Painting." 2. Section "Exterior Painting." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated including labeling machines if used. B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification specific products. C. Drawing: Depicting specific nomenclature for instruction signs including control -by - event or explanation of systems operations for: 1. Switchboards. 2. Remotely grounded equipment. D. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 1 Page 42 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 B. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive -attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady USA, Inc. Industrial Products Division. 2. BW Industries, Inc. 3. Ideal Industries, Inc. 4. Rhino/DYMO, a Newell Rubbermaid Company. 5. Seton Name Plate Corporation. 2.2 FONT A. Arial uppercase. B. Text abbreviations other than equipment identifications permitted only as approved. 2.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 2 Page 43 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 B. Color for System Identification and Printed Text: 1. Per system or NEC branch color coding specified. 2. Identification Label: Indicate system or service. Include branch and voltage text for NEC electrical distribution. C. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.4 BOX WIRING IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Self -Adhesive Write -On Tags: Vinyl type with black pre-printed "System/Panelboard:", "Circuit No:" and "Load:" in three fill in lines on white field. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, blank ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. B. Self -Adhesive Labels: Field machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process with System/Panelboard, Circuit No. and Load text. C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, length as required for text by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped text, punched or drilled for screw mounting. • 2.5 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification text machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014 inch (0.35 -mm- thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed text, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped text, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener. E. Tie On Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion - resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. • F. Self-adhesive Write -On Tags: Vinyl type with black pre-printed "System/Panelboard:", "Circuit No.:", and "Load:" in three fill in lines on white field. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 3 Page 44 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.6 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. 3 inch (75 -mm) wide, 5 mil (0.12 -mm) pressure -sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.7 UNDERGROUND LINE WARNING TAPE A. Description: Permanent, yellow colored, continuous -printed, polyethylene tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct -burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed text shall indicate type of underground line. 2.8 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self -Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). D. Metal Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose- acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 inch (1 mm) galvanized -steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). 2.9 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved text with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. B. Electrical Assembly Single -Line: 1. Framed acrylic screw mounted full size record drawing. 2. Printed operating instructions may be included as an option to separate signage. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 4 Page 45 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 2.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS • • A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, color coded by system, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm). B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, color coded by system, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet -resistant seal for label. C. Self -Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, color coded by system. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm). D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting, color coded by system. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm). E. Stenciled Text: In nonfading, waterproof, [black] <Insert color> ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert height>. 2.11 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. Minimum letter height shall be 1/4 inch 93.2 mm). 2.12 ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Dot Label: 1/2 inch (64 mm) vinyl dot color coded by system. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL COLOR CODING OF SYSTEMS A. Provide NEC electrical distribution branch color coding as follows: 1. Normal: a. System ID or Nameplate: Black b. Text: White c. Conductors: Per associated 2. Generator: a. System ID or Nameplate: Green b. Text: White GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 5 Page 46 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 c. Conductors: Per associated 3. Emergency: a. System ID or Nameplate: Yellow b. Text: Black c. Conductors: Per associated B. Provide Division 23 systems color coding as follows: 1. Building Automation System: a. System ID or Nameplate: Orange b. Text: Yellow c. Cable Jacket: Orange with Yellow C. Provide Division 26 systems color coding as follows: 1. Center Hung Cable Tray (tips): a. System ID: Per associated Section 2. Wiring Devices and Wall Plates: a. System ID: Per associated Section 3. Lighting Control Systems: a. System ID or Nameplate: Gray b. Text: White c. Cable Jacket: Gray with White 4. Miscellaneous Control: a. System ID or Nameplate: Gray b. Text: Yellow c. Cable Jacket: Gray with Yellow D. Provide Division 27 systems color coding as follows: 1. Structured Cabling: a. System ID/Cable Jacket: 1) OF Multimode Orange 2) OF Multimode Aqua 3) OF Sinalemode Yellow 4) Copper backbone Gray 5) Horizontal cable Blue b. Nameplate/Text: Per EIA/TIA c. Raceway: Yellow 2. [Voice][Telephone]: a. System ID/Cable Jacket: 1) Copper backbone Gray 2) Horizontal cable Yello b. Nameplate/Text: Per EIA/TIA c. Raceway/Inner duct: Blue 3. Public Address: a. System ID/Cable Jacket: Gray GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 6 Page 47 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 b. Nameplate: Dark c. Text: White d. Raceway: White 4. [Audio -Visual] [Television] [Video]: a. System ID/Cable Jacket: TP Purple or Coax b. Nameplate: Dark Brown c. Text: Yellow d. Raceway: Black 5. Intercom: a. System ID/Cable Jacket: Gray b. Nameplate: Light c. Text: Black d. Raceway: White E. Provide Division 28 systems color coding as follows: 1. Security: a. System ID/Cable Jacket: Green b. Nameplate: Dark c. Text: White d. Raceway: Yellow 2. Door Monitoring and Access Control: a. System ID/Cable Jacket: Yellow b. Nameplate: Dark c. Text: Yellow d. Raceway/Innerduct: Yellow 3. Fire Alarm: a. System ID/Cable Jacket: Red b. Nameplate: Red c. Text: Whit d. Raceway: Red 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. Use Drawing nomenclature unless otherwise directed. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 7 Page 48 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceway Systems and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or raceway. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. G. Box and Equipment Identification: Attach to box or enclosure cover in location with high visibility. H. Color -Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed in Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (100-600 Volts)" for ungrounded [service, feeder, and branch -circuit] conductors. 1. Field -Applied, Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half -lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. I. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. J. Underground Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground- line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. K. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Raceway Systems and Cables Identification: 1. Accessible Raceways, AC and MC Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 amperes: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label per NEC electrical distribution branch color coding including identification label. Install at box and conduit fittings within 12 inches, each side of joints, and at bushed conduits. 2. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Division 23 through 28 Systems: Identify the systems with preprinted identification label, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands per color coding. Install at box and conduit fittings within 12 inches, each side of joints, and at bushed conduits. a. Exception: No identification required for raceways and cable with readily identifiable terminations within the same room. • B. Box Identification: 1. Color -coded, field painting: Initial color -coded field painting of inside of system boxes and enclosures is allowable for Contractor identifications during wiring GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 8 Page 49 ID • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 installation. 2. Wiring Identification: Identify Division 21-28 system or panelboard, circuit number, and load on outside of box cover with self-adhesive vinyl labels. a. For finished areas or exterior areas, locate identification inside box cover. C. Conductor Identification: 1. Branch -Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. 2. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and circuit number. 3. Pull wires in Empty Raceways: Tag pull wires at each end and in each intermediate box, manhole, or other enclosure identifying other end location using metal tags. 4. Division 23 through 28 Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. a. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals within boxes, enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. b. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory -installed connections. c. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. D. Device Wall Plate Identification: 1. Device Wall Plate Identification: Engrave plates below with 1/8 inch high black uppercase letters. 2. All Emergency Red NEMA 5-15R and 5-20R receptacles shall be labeled with self- adhesive typed label with the following branch circuit source information: a. "EMERGENCY." b. Panelboard number. c. Circuit number. d. Example: "EMERGENCY/1LSL1-3." 3. Other than NEMA 5-15R and 5-20R receptacles shall be labeled with self- adhesive typed label with the following: a. Voltage. b. Number of phases. c. Current rating. d. Example: "208/3P/50A." 4. Receptacles protected upstream on associated branch circuit by a ground fault circuit interrupter device shall be laser or mechanically/ engraved "GFCI PROTECTED." 5. Switch used as equipment or motor disconnect shall be laser or mechanically engraved "Disconnect/ (Device Designation)" (i.e. "Disconnect/Ice Machine", "Disconnect/D4- EF01 ", etc.). GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 9 Page 50 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 6. Special systems/communication systems devices (i.e. firephone receptacles) shall be laser or mechanically engraved designating device type per Owner representative requirements (i.e. FIREPHONE, DATA, EKG, TEL, TV, etc.). 7. 4 -gang and larger multiple switch installations shall be laser or mechanically engraved with designating lighting type and/or area (i.e. Night Light, North, etc.) 8. Wiring device circuit identification for NEMA 5-15R and NEMA 5-20R receptacles and all switches other than emergency use [red] NEMA 5-15R and 5- 20R receptacles: Use box wiring identification self-adhesive labels on back of wall plate. E. Warning Tapes, Labels, and Signs: 1. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground- line warning tape for both direct -buried cables and cables in raceway. 2. Warning Labels for Identification for Branch Circuit Ungrounded Conductors: Install at all branch circuit panelboards, cabinets, and enclosures per NFPA 70. Provide black text on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access generally. For flush mounted panelboards in finished spaces, install on inside of protective device door. a. For 208/120 volt systems, lines and text shall be: 1) "208/120 VOLT SYSTEM" 2) "PHASE A — BLACK" 3) "PHASE B — RED" 4) "PHASE C — BLUE" b. For 480/277 volt systems, lines and text shall be: 1) "480/277 VOLT SYSTEM" 2) "PHASE A — BROWN" 3) "PHASE B — ORANGE" 4) "PHASE C — YELLOW" 3. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following texts: a. Low Voltage Room Door Sign: "DANGER -ELECTRICAL HAZARD — AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY". b. Service Disconnect Sign: "SERVICE DISCONNECT." c. Generator Disconnect Sign: "GENERATOR XX DISCONNECT." d. Fire Pump Disconnect Sign: "FIRE PUMP DISCONNECT." e. Multiple Power Source Warning (locate at each service and generator disconnect equipment): "DANGER — ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD — EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES. STANDBY POWER SOURCE LOCATED IN SERVICE YARD OF BUILDING." f. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black text on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1) Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to front of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 10 Page 51 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 a) Transfer switches. b) Controls with external control power connections. g. Fused and Non -Fused Motor Disconnect Switches: Install baked enamel warning sign with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8 inch high lettering with the following designation — "DANGER, DO NOT USE TO START OR STOP MOTOR. USE FOR ISOLATION ONLY." h. Back -Fed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Where switches and devices such as knife switches, circuit breakers, molded -case switches, and contracots are installed such that the load side of the switch device could energize with the seitch open due to back feeding, provide a warning plate with the wording "WARNING —LOAD SIDE OF SWITCH MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED", shall be installed on the switch. Arc Flash Hazard Warning: Per NFPA 70 requirements. F. Instruction Signs: 1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. 2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8 -inch- (10 -mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. 3. Electrical Assembly Single -Line: Install at end of assembly or as otherwise located on Drawings. G. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label on each major unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self- explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text in field designating the equipment served. Utilize NEC electrical distribution branch color coded field and lettering for equipment connected. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Electrical equipment nameplates shall also designate line side source (i.e. FED FROM: " " ROOM # " ") in smaller than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) text. Smaller nameplate text may be used where adequate nameplate mounting space is not available, but in no case shall the text be smaller than 1/8 -inch (3.2 mm). Apply labels mechanically with machine screws or pop rivets for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment and those scheduled on Drawings for electrical equipment and panelboard designations. Transfer switches shall include similar emergency and normal fed from and load identification text. a. Automatic transfer switch. b. Battery chargers. c. Boxes (Pull, Junction, or Branch Circuit) when given specific designation on drawings. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 11 Page 52 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 d. Communication/special systems cabinets and backboards. e. Contactors. f. Control devices. g. Dimming racks and panels. h. Disconnect switches. i. Distribution panelboards protective devices. j. Emergency generator set. k. Emergency generator control system relays and protective devices. 1. Fire alarm system field processing units, terminal cabinets, peripheral monitor and control addressable relay modules, fire phone cabinets and remote duct detector test stations. m. Generator tool kit cabinets. n. Ground buses and terminal bars. o. Metering equipment. 1) Designate motor function (i.e. "CW Pump P-1"), not "P-1." p. Motor controllers. 1) Designate motor function (i.e. "CW Pump P-1"), not "P-1." a) Manual transfer switch. q. Other systems. r. Panelboards. s. Security panels. t. Separately mounted motor controllers. u. Single -pole switches and fractional horsepower manual starters used for motor disconnect switch. v. Spare fuse cabinet. w. Surge protection devices. x. Switchboards and associated protective devices. y. Separately mounted circuit breakers. z. Standard telecommunication system. aa. Transfer switch. bb. Transformers. 2. Refer to appropriate sections for other identification marking requirements and nomenclature. 3. Attach identification after finish painting. H. Component Identification Labels: 1. Apply component identification labels to distribution panelboard and switchboard: a. Assembly Nameplate: Apply per equipment identification label requirements except 1 -inch (80 mm) identification text. b. Cubicle Label: Apply 1/2 -inch (40 mm) black text on white plate identifying left -to- right number with 1/4 -inch (20 mm) black text below identification section type(s): 1) Pull. 2) Main Circuit Breaker. 3) Utility Metering. 4) Customer Metering. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 12 Page 53 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 5) Transformer # XX. 6) Distribution #XX. 7) Main Lugs. 8) Transition. 9) Transfer Switch. 10) Battery. 11) Panelboard. 12) Circuit Breaker. 13) Spare. 14) Space. 15) Motor Controller. c. Protective Device Load Label: Apply 1/4 -inch (20 mm) text on plate per system color coding identifying load served. d. Miscellaneous Component Labels: Apply 1/4 -inch (20 mm) black text on white plate identifying components and instruments mounted on front or within the assembly such as relays, fuses, switches, terminal blocks. I. Above Ceiling Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Apply adhesive dot labels to nearest exposed ceiling grid or associated access panel latch for the following above ceiling equipment: a. System type occupancy sensor control and relay units. b. Fire alarm addressable relay. c. Remote lighting ballast. d. Power supply. e. Strategic termination box enclosure. f. Data location: 1) Wireless access point. 2) Camera (IP) location. 3) Projection unit. g. Card access controller. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 53 - 13 Page 54 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 26 05 75 CONDUIT ROUGH -IN SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Conduit Rough -In Systems and pathways for communication and signaling systems cabling and boxes including all work incidental thereto as shown on Drawings and specified. B. Requirements of the following Sections and Drawings apply to this Section: 1. Division 06 for plywood equipment backboards. 2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for general firestopping requirements. 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for general wall sealants. 4. Architectural Drawings and Specifications for locations of the resistance rated barriers and smoke barriers. 5. Division 20 Section "Common Work Results, Division 21 through 28" apply to this Section. C. Requirements of the following Division 26 Sections apply to this Section: 1. Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements." 2. Section "Basic Materials and Methods." 3. Section "Raceways." 4. Section "Sleeves and Fire -Rated Cable Assemblies." 5. Section "Boxes and Cabinets." 6. Section "Wiring Devices." 7. Section "Electrical Identification." 8. Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 9. Section "Panelboards." 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following Standards and Codes: 1. ANSI/EIA/TIA — 568B: Commercial Building Telecommunications 2. ANSI/EIA/TIA — 569B: 3. ANSI/EIA/TIA — 606A: 4. ANSI -J -STD -607-A: 5. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001: GRINER ENGINEERING INC. Cabling Standard Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings Commercial Building Grounding, Earthing and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Page 55 260575-1 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 6. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 7. All addenda, technical service bulletins, etc., associated with the above reference standards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Pathway: Routing of cabling from work area outlet box to telecommunications room. Pathways may consist of outlet boxes, cabinets, surface raceways, conduit, conduit stub, conduit sleeve(s), cable tray, J -Hooks, etc. where system cabling will be run. B. Rough -In: Preparation for system(s) cabling and equipment installations. C. System Cabling: Low voltage signal and control cabling. System cabling is designated by the manufacturer for a particular system in each specification section. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate all requirements of the Owner's and manufacturer's representatives for all room preparation, pathways and specific rough -in installation requirements, including associated sizing, location and labeling, for the following systems: 1. Division 23 Systems: a. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC. 2. Division 25 Systems: a. Integrated Facility Control. 3. Division 26 Systems: a. Automatic Line Voltage Lighting Control Equipment. b. Lighting Dimming. c. Wallbox Preset Dimming. 4. Division 27 Systems: a. Structured Telecommunications Cabling. b. Broadband Television Distribution c. Audio Visual Cabling. 5. Division 28 Systems: a. Fire Alarm. b. Access Control / Intrusion Detection. c. Protective Services CCTV Distribution. d. Video Surveillance. B. Coordinate equipment backboard installations including: 1. Meet Owner's and manufacturer's representative layout requirements. 2. Ensurance that installer: a. Provides spacers between wall and backboard to support and locate intended equipment. b. Locates backboard 6 inches above finish floor level around room. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 2 Page 56 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 c. Paints backboard white on all sides with appropriate print. d. Allows for flush rough -in of wiring devices. e. Allows for cable management and slots behind backboards. f. Allows for signal grounding installation per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Coordinate sleeves and fire -rated cable assemblies for pathways and cable per Division 26 Section "Sleeves." 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements". 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Provide per "Basic Division 26 Requirements" Include: 1. Details for all identified systems equipment rooms including, but not limited to those rooms labeled: a. Cable Pull. b. Communications. c. Data. d. Network. e. MDF. f. Server. g. Tel/Data. h. Telecommunications. 2. Floor plans for each system local equipment room service area depicting: a. Cabling pathways, color coding and field equipment, identification labels. b. Specific equipment, outlet and patching identification labels. 3. Sign -offs of Owner's and manufacturer's representatives for each document submitted. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Documents: 1. Submit updated Coordination Drawings as Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Flush wall mounted 4-11/16 inches square, 3-5/8" deep pressed galvanized steel minimum. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 3 Page 57 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1. Utilize 4-11/16" square, 2-1/8" deep backbox with 4-11/16" square, 1-1/2" deep extension ring to meet backbox depth requirement; if 3-1/2" deep box not available. 2. Provide plastic bushings at grommet of outlet box where open cabling installation is allowed to directly enter outlet box (in ceiling spaces). B. Mullion Mounted Devices: 1. Flush backbox or open ring as recommended by device manufacturer for installation in metal door frame/aluminum door frame as shown on Drawings. 2. Coordinate installation and conduit access with door frame and door hardware manufacturer's for cabling routing and connectivity. C. Cable Bushings: 1. Bush cable opening for device boxes without conduit stubs. 2.2 PLASTER COVER A. Single gang, galvanized steel, for single gang device. B. Two gang, galvanized steel, for two -gang device. 1. Provide steel barrier for devices requiring power and low voltage device to be mounted in same backbox. 2.3 COVER PLATES A. Same material, finish and color as for wiring devices. Refer to Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices." B. Single gang for single device with appropriate opening, split plate, etc. for device to be installed. C. Two gang for combination NEMA 5 receptacle and communications/device with appropriate openings for receptacle and opening, split plate, etc. for device to be installed. D. Two gang as required for system outlets. E. Device opening shall be bushed one -inch when used for wire pull. F. Blank as shown on Drawings or when single device type not used. 2.4 RACEWAYS A. Refer to Division 26 Section "Raceways" for requirements. Provide with insulated throats and bushings on all conduit runs, stubs and sleeves. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 8 Page 58 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 2.5 SLEEVES A. Refer to Division 07 and Division 26 Section "Sleeves" for firestopping requirements. 2.6 CABLE J -HOOKS A. Metallic J -hook bracket (1-1/2" wide) with cable retainer or Velcro strap, ceiling or support rod mounted. 1. Provide system manufacturer recommended fasteners. B. Category 6 compliant. C. Acceptable Manufacturers/Series: 1. Caddy Cat. 32 Series. 2. B -Line BCH32 Series. 3. Or Approved Equivalent. 2.7 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS A. Refer to Division 06 for plywood equipment backboard requirements. 2.8 CABLE DISTRIBUTION SPOOLS FOR BACKBOARDS A. Fire -Retardant, high strength composite material. B. 1-1/2" length. C. Promotes compliance with T568B bend radius (4 x cable diameter) 2.9 CABINETS AND COMMUNICATION RACKS A. Refer to Division 26 Section "Boxes and Cabinets" for cabinet requirements. B. Refer to Division 27 Section "Communications Cabinets and Racks" for communications type rack assemblies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT AND PATHWAYS APPLICATIONS A. Conduit Raceways (completely enclosed wiring): 1. Shall be used for separate and independent horizontal system cabling routing for each of the following systems: a. Division 26 Systems: GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 9 Page 59 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1) Automatic Line Voltage Lighting Control Equipment. 2) Lighting Dimming. 3) Wallbox Preset Dimming. b. Division 27 Systems: 1) Broadband Television Distribution. 2) Structured Telecommunications Cabling. 3) Audio Visual Cabling. c. Division 28 Systems: 1) Fire Alarm. 2) Access Control / Intrusion Detection. 3) Video Surveillance. 2. Shall be used for: a. Systems backbone and trunk risers. b. Systems outlet boxes to accessible ceiling. c. Systems outlet boxes to accessible corridor ceiling. d. Systems outlet boxes to cable tray termination. B. J — Hooks: 1. Shall be used for separate and independent cabling routing for each of the following systems: a. Division 28 Systems: 1) Fire Alarm. 2) Access Control / Intrusion Detection. 3) Protective Services CCTV Distribution. 4) Video Surveillance. 2. Shall be used for area horizontal ceiling space corridor cabling for the following systems: a. Division 23 Systems: 1) Instrumentation and Control for HVAC. b. Division 25 Systems: 1) Integrated Facility Control. c. Division 26 Systems: 1) Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 2) Automatic Line Voltage Lighting Control Equipment. 3) Lighting Dimming. 4) Wallbox Preset Dimming. d. Division 27 Systems: 1) Broadband Television Distribution. 2) Structured Telecommunications Cabling. 3) Audio Visual Cabling. e. Division 28 Systems: 1) Fire Alarm. 2) Access Control / Intrusion Detection. 3) Protective Services CCTV Distribution. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 10 Page 60 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 4) Video Surveillance. 3. Shall be used for: a. Equipment room backboard cable management. b. Accessible ceiling cabling not installed in other pathways. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install all pathways in accordance with EIA/TIA 569A Standards, associated addenda and technical service bulletins and per manufacturer's requirements. a. Install all pathways in a safe, neat, professional, workmanlike manner. b. Coordinate size of pathways such that EIA/TIA maximum fill requirements are not exceeded for that raceway size at 40% fill maximum. 2. Provide pathways to conceal all cabling in the facility except where specifically indicated otherwise. 3. Coordinate pathway installation such that it is independently supported. 4. Install all pathways parallel and perpendicular to building lines and tight to structure. Install pathways such that multiple cabling runs to the same geographic location will utilize similar pathway routing to destination point. 5. Route cabling pathways to the system equipment room from indicated zone or as shown on Drawings. In general, provide system outlet box pathways to the equipment room on the same floor to a system cabinet or identified equipment. 6. Install pathways to avoid elevator shafts, elevator equipment rooms or any areas that contain or store hazardous materials. 7. Install pathways to avoid sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) for all pathways. a. Maintain one foot minimum from fluorescent lighting (ballast). b. Maintain four foot minimum from all transformers. c. Maintain ten foot minimum from electrical power cabling or distribution panels exceeding 480 volts. d. Maintain one foot minimum from electrical power cabling. e. Maintain two inch minimum from electrical power cabling less than 220 volts. f. Shorten distances if sufficient EMI isolation is provided and given prior approval by engineer. 8. Avoid routing pathways in areas subject to excessive environmental conditions. Acceptable conditions are: a. Temperature range: 5°C — 50°C. b. Relative humidity range: 5% - 95%. 9. Install raceway and equipment identifications per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." Label all pathways and associated termination points. a. Provide system identifying nameplate centered on main trunk riser boxes, equipment backboards, ground buses, and cabinets (i.e. DATACOM, CCTV, etc.). b. Identify fiber optic labeling risers installed in ENT or Innerduct GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 11 Page 61 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 every 10 feet on center "Fiber Optic Cabling." B. Outlet Boxes: 1. General: a. Install systems outlets flush in new wall construction. b. Do not install backboxes back-to-back. 1) Maintain a minimum of 12" separation. 2) Maintain a minimum of 24" separation in fire -rated walls. c. Mount outlets alongside associated power receptacles where applicable. d. Mount all outlet boxes vertically, unless otherwise noted. e. Install raceway to avoid obstructions in the field such as molding, built-in cabinets, wiring devices, etc. f. Install blank coverplates where device type is not installed. Coordinate such locations with the appropriate systems representatives, and the Owner. C. Raceways: 1. Refer to Division 26 Section "Raceways" for basic routing and installation requirements. 2. Furnish and install trunk riser raceways, junction boxes, outlet box raceways and outlet boxes as specified and shown on Drawings. 3. Stub trunk riser and extend system outlet box raceways into accessible ceiling space. 4. Stub trunk riser and extend system outlet box raceways into accessible corridor ceiling space. 5. Stub trunk riser and extend system outlet box raceways into accessible corridor ceiling and terminate at cable tray system. 6. Provide cap for all conduit stubs and cover for outlet boxes to eliminate debris from entering boxes or conduits. Remove any debris found in conduits or outlet boxes upon cable installation. 7. Provide a dedicated conduit for cable installation for each Division 27 structured telecommunications cabling system outlet box. These outlet boxes shall not be connected together with conduit between boxes. 8. Provide minimum outlet box conduit size and conduit sleeve size at 1 inch. a. Use chart below for minimum conduit size requirements based on maximum 40% fill for indicated quantity of cables. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 12 Page 62 • r • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 Inside Diameter mm Trade Size Cable Outside Diameter mm (in) 3.3 (0.13) 4.6 (0.18) 5.6 (0.22) 6.1 (0.24) 7.4 (0.29) 7.9 (0.31) 9.4 (0.37) 13.5 (0.53) 15.8 (0.62) 17.8 (0.70) 21 3/4 6 5 4 3 2 2 1 0 0 0 27 1 8 8 7 6 3 3 2 1 0 0 35 1-1/4 16 14 12 10 6 4 3 1 1 1 41 1-1/2 20 18 16 15 7 6 4 2 1 1 53 2 30 26 22 20 14 12 7 4 3 2 63 2-1/2 45 40 36 30 17 14 12 6 3 3 78 3 70 60 50 40 20 20 17 7 6 6 91 3-1/2 22 12 7 6 103 4 30 14 12 7 9. Mark each conduit end for identification and destination of raceway. 10. Install all raceways such that the cabling manufacturer's minimum bend radius is not exceeded. 11. Furnish and install 200 pound test, braided nylon pullcords in all conduits and as shown on Drawings. Label all pullcords. 12. Provide complete conduit systems in areas with non -accessible ceilings for all cable systems. 13. Utilize surface raceway in finished areas where cabling cannot be concealed. 14. Feed multi -channel surface raceway, where shown on Drawings, with one (1) conduit for special outlets and one (1) conduit for power to feed multiple outlets. Refer to ANSUEIA/TIA 569-A and NFPA 70 for conduit size requirements. 15. Special Fiber Optic Raceways: a. Install backbone fiber optic cabling in plenum rated ENT (innerduct) raceway per Division 26 Section "Raceways." Install ENT in cable tray if available, using proper connectors and fittings. 16. Provide conduit segment length at no more than 100 feet with a maximum of two 90 degree bends. Additional junction/pull boxes shall be installed to allow more bends or length of conduit. Refer to EIA/TIA 569A. Coordinate location to nearby cable spool or cable management device. 17. Install telecommunications raceways to within six inches of equipment backboards, data racks and termination units. a. Coordinate location and termination to cable management device. 18. Provide a minimum of 10 -inch inside curve radius of conduits for each 1 - inch in diameter of installed conduit. D. J -Hook Installation: 1. Provide independent J -hook pathways per system where cable tray is not shown, (minimum of 4 J -hooks mounted horizontally) in accessible ceiling space mounted a maximum of 4 and 5 feet on center. Mount pathway level, GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 13 Page 63 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 tight to structure and allow accessible installation of cabling. 2. Furnish and install single mounted J -hooks from individual conduits serving outlet boxes, mounted 4 feet on center maximum. 3. Ensure cabling is supported properly and cable does not sag or droop in excess of 8" from between supports. E. Cable Distribution Spools: 1. Install distribution cable spools (mushrooms) on equipment backboards to allow cable support/routing. Mount spools along edge of boards, 6 inches from each corner and 1 foot on center, minimum. 3.3 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Post copy of appropriate systems record drawings in local equipment room as required by Owner representatives. Hang set on equipment backboard using proper anchoring techniques. END OF SECTION 26 05 75 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 26 05 75 - 14 Page 64 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II SECTION 26 28 70 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: GEI No.17071 July 27, 2017 A. Extent of motor and circuit disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings, schedules, and code requirements. B. Types of motor and circuit disconnect switches in this section including the following: 1. Equipment disconnects. 2. Appliance disconnects. 3. Motor -circuit disconnects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Siemens 3. Square D Company 4. Cutler -Hammer 2.2 DISCONNECTED SWITCHES: A. General -Duty Disconnect Switches: Provide surface -mounted, general -duty type, sheet steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 volts, 200 amperes and below, 60 hertz, with blades and poles as indicated in drawings; incorporating spring assisted, quick -make, quick - break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable, and is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of high -conductivity copper, with silver -tungsten type switch contacts, and stamped enclosure knockouts. Provide type enclosure suitable for the application. Use NEMA 3R for all outdoor applications. B. Heavy -Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface -mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics GRINER ENGINEERING INC. Section 26 28 70 - 1 Page 65 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI No.17071 July 27, 2017 indicated; fusible type, rated 600 volts, 400 amperes and below, 60 hertz, blades and poles as indicated in drawings, solid neutral; incorporating quick -make, quick -break type switches; so construct that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high -conductivity copper, with silver -tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Provide NEMA type 3R enclosure for outdoor. C. Fuses: Provide fuses for safety switches, as recommended by switch manufacturer, of classes, types, and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for service indicated. Provide fuses to match equipment label requirements when fuse information is furnished as part of the equipment label. D. Provide electrical interlock kits for all disconnects serving variable frequency drives. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where required by code, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches used with motor -driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount disconnect switches securely. Use stainless steel or silicon bronze fasteners for mounting outdoor switches. E. Where building walls or equipment frames do not provide suitable mounting surface, provide galvanized unistrut frames or racks which will securely support the disconnect switch. Indoor frames may be painted unistrut frames. END OF SECTION 26 28 70 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. Section 26 28 70 - 2 Page 66 • City of Clearwater Spectrum Field Phase II • • Prepared For: City of Clearwater Floridan Prepared By: Griner Engineering, Inc. 1628 First Avenue North St. Petersburg, FL 33713 Office (727) 822-2335 Fax (727) 821-3361 July 27, 2017 GEI Project No. 17071 CITY OF CLEARWATER SPECTRUM FIELD MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX Section # Section Name # of Pages DIVISION 09 099000 Painting 1, DIVISION 23 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 13, 230548 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 25 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 29 230700 HVAC Insulation 37 232113 Hydronic Piping 43 232300 HVAC Piping 49 233300 Air Duct Accessories 56 • 238126 Split System Air -Conditioners 59 238146 Water -Source Unitary Heat Pumps 65 • • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements, Contractual Conditions, and General Requirements of Division One shall apply to all work hereunder. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section includes furnishing all materials, labor, scaffolding, tools, equipment for all painting and all related items necessary to complete the work shown or specified. 1. Prime coats specified herein shall not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats already applied. 2. Following Specifications, cover complete painting and finishing of all wood, plaster, concrete, concrete block, drywall, unfinished metal and other surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building, except as otherwise specified. 3. Painting contractor shall examine Specifications for various other trades and shall thoroughly familiarize himself with their provisions regarding their painting; he shall understand that all surfaces that are left unfinished by requirements of other Specifications shall be painted and finished as part of this Contract. 4. If woodwork, metal or any other surfaces to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding and puttying operations, painting contractor shall immediately notify General Contractor or Architect in writing, or assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory finish resulting. 1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Work not included under this Section: 1. Factory finished items. 2. Furring and runner channels specified in the plaster and gypsum wallboard sections. 3. Unexposed galvanized surfaces. 4. Non-ferrous metals. 5. Exposed concrete floors. 6. Precast concrete panels. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 1 Page 1 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY • • A. Coordinate and schedule the work required under this Section with that of the other trades in order not to delay the progress of the job. Examine all locations where work is to be performed and notify the Architect and General Contractor in writing if defects exist which are detrimental to the proper or timely performance of the work. Do not begin work until such defects have been remedied or adjusted. B. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to own and use a wet film thickness gauge to check his application thickness as he proceeds. This method shall be used and checked against the volume solids and coverage rates. Approved gauge: Nordson Wet Film Thickness Gauge, Amherst, Ohio. 1.5 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01340 — Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples B. Division 3 — Concrete C. Division 5 — Metals D. Division 6 — Wood and Plastic E. Section 09250 — Gypsum Wallboard 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND SUBMITTALS A. Within thirty (30) days after award of Contract, the Contractor, together with the manufacturer whose materials he proposes to furnish, shall prepare a "Detailed Painting Schedule" for the approval of the Architect. The "Detailed Painting Schedule" so prepared shall be based on the surfaces, types of painting materials, and number of coats required, as set forth in the "Painting Schedule" hereinafter, substituting for each type of painting material listed therein or required, the corresponding brand designation of the product of the approved manufacturer proposed for each use. For each application listed or required, the brand designation and grade of the highest quality material produced by the approved manufacturer shall be submitted. B. Submit product analysis and performance characteristics for all paint materials, as requested by the Architect. C. Submit duplicate copies of manufacturer's color chip guide for Architect's selection. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 2 Page 2 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE • • A. All paint materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in original containers and packages bearing the manufacturer's name and shall be delivered ready -mixed. B. All paint and flammable materials and equipment used on the job shall be stored a minimum of 50 feet from the building, in a separate, enclosure and well -marked as, "Flammable Storage Area", "No smoking within 50 feet of this Area". Sign shall be posted and enforced. The storage area shall be kept neat and clean. Floors shall be adequately protected from paint spillage. All cloths and cotton waste which might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in metal containers and destroyed at the end of each work day. All damage caused to surfaces within the storage area shall be repaired. A fire extinguisher shall be provided and fully charged at all times for this area. 1.8 GUARANTEE A. All work shall be guaranteed by this Contractor against defects caused by use of inferior materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of building. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: 1. The term "paint", as used in this Section, includes emulsions, enamels, paints, coatings and sealers. Paint shall be well -ground, shall not settle badly, cake or thicken in the container, and shall have easy brushing properties. 2. Paint materials shall be of approved manufacturer as specified and of the types listed in the "Painting Schedule" hereinafter, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Architect. 3. Paint colors shall be as selected by the Architect. Prime coats and undercoats shall be tinted approximately to the shade of the final coat, but shall each have a slight variation of color to distinguish them from the preceding coat. All finish paints shall be "ready -mixed", matching the approved color display. B. ASTM designations referred to herein are from the so designated Standard Specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials (latest edition); materials specified shall conform to such designations, except as modified herein: 1. Raw linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D234. 2. Boiled linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D260. 3. Turpentine shall conform to ASTM D13. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 3 Page 3 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 4. Drier shall conform to ASTM D600 for Class 'B' drier, unless otherwise recommended by the approved paint manufacturer. 5. Mineral spirits shall conform to ASTM D235. 6. White lead shall conform to ASTM D81. C. Shellac shall conform to the requirements for refined Type I medium body shellac of the Federal Specifications for shellac varnish, Designation: TT -V-91 lb. D. Spackling compound shall be finely ground, grit -free when dry, and shall set with no shrinkage to a smooth, hard, white surface that shall sand properly and receive any finish. E. Patching plaster shall be white, non -shrinking, containing no lime, and uniform in set and quality. F. Acetic acid solution shall be a 5% solution of acetic acid CH3COOH. G. Where paints require special thinners, dryers, or prior surface washes, or where painting equipment requires special cleaning agents, such materials shall be as recommended by the approved paint manufacturer for the indicated use. H. Painting materials, shellac and any other material specified herein shall meet U.S.G.B.C. LEED Building Design and Construction, current edition, for low - emitting materials. 2.2 APPROVED PAINTING MATERIALS A. The products herein specified are those known suitable for this type of work and are based on those manufactured by Benjamin Moore. Trade names used only to set a standard of quality desired B. Subject to full compliance with all requirements, the following manufacturers offer products which may be incorporated into the work: 1. Benjamin Moore 2. Pittsburgh Paints 3. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. 4. ICI Paints C. Other manufacturers with similar products meeting all requirements may be acceptable upon complete data submittal and Architect approval prior to Bidding in accordance with Division 1. D. Company's equivalent materials will be approved on a submittal basis, subject to conformance with field requirements. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 4 Page 4 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 E. When painting is to be started, the manufacturer whose materials have been approved for use shall furnish competent technical assistance on the job to ensure that his materials are being applied properly. This assistance shall be available at all times until completion of the work. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All metal and concrete surfaces to be painted, including those previously shop or prime coated, shall be examined to determine their acceptability for receiving paints and coatings herein specified. Unacceptable surfaces shall be corrected by sandblasting, waterblasting, acid etching, power tooling, rubbing, or any other methods recommended by the coating material supplier. The Architect shall be advised of corrective measures before proceeding with the work. Application of coatings signifies acceptance of surfaces and responsibility for performance of coatings. 3.2 PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL AND PROPERTY A. Complete protection shall be furnished from paint drippings to the work, personnel, and equipment of other trades, and to the Owner's property by the use of tarpaulins, dropcloths, masking, or other protective covering. All protective measures shall be taken to prevent accident and fire, to safeguard equipment and personnel, and to prevent interference with normal operations. All tarpaulins and dropcloths used shall be flameproofed by chemical treatment. Paint droppings and overflows shall be cleaned off as they occur. B. Do not paint fire rated labels that are on doors, windows, shutters, frames, etc. 3.3 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING SURFACES A. Fixtures, frames, escutcheons, cover plates, and other similar objects on walls and ceilings to receive paint shall be removed prior to application of material and stored in protected area until ready to be replaced. B. Tarpaulins, dropcloths, masking tape, and other suitable covers shall be used, as required, to protect adjacent and underlying surfaces that are likely to be stained, spotted, or otherwise marred. C. This Contractor shall be held responsible for any staining of other work and must either entirely remove the stains or replace the stained surface. D. Hardware Protection: It shall be the painting subcontractor's responsibility to protect all finish hardware from paint damage; any damaged hardware shall be GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 5 Page 5 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • replaced at his expense. Door silencers shall not be installed until door frames have • • been painted. 3.4 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Metal Surfaces: 1. General: All metal surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of concrete, mortar, plaster, weld -burn, shavings, dirt, dust, and other objectionable matter. Wire brushes shall not be used on galvanized and shop painted surfaces. All rust, loose or disintegrated paint, grease and scale shall be removed from metal work before priming or field coats are applied. 2. Unpainted Ferrous Metal: Surfaces shall be cleaned with wire brushes or by other proper and acceptable means. Grease and oil shall be removed with benzine or other similar volatile cleaners. The surfaces shall be free from moisture or frost. 3. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Surfaces: Grease and oil shall be removed with benzine or other similar volatile cleaner. Surfaces shall then be treated with an approved chemical compound such as phosphoric acid wash. The chemical compound shall be completely removed with clean, fresh water, and the surfaces thoroughly dried prior to priming. 4. Zinc -Chromate Shop Painted Ferrous Metal: Grease and oil shall be removed with benzine or other similar volatile cleaner. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to the shop coat. Abraded or marred shop coats shall be touched -up with the same paint as used for priming. 5. Structural and miscellaneous metals are specified to be shipped to the jobsite with prime coat. Items shall be touched -up, as necessary, at the jobsite prior to erection. a. Ferrous materials delivered to the jobsite without shop coats shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed in the field. Cleaning shall be in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparations Specifications #2. After cleaning, all surfaces except galvanized shall be primed with zinc -chromate iron oxide primer, equal to Pittsburgh's formulation 17-6. Galvanized surfaces shall be prepared as hereinafter specified and given a special galvanized primer. All rust, oil, grease, etc. shall be removed. B. After erection, all weld splatter shall be removed and additional cleaning done, as required, to ensure a proper paint bond. The prime shall be applied to all surfaces as soon as possible after cleaning. C. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: 1. Surfaces shall have cured properly for at least ten (10) days. Wall and floor surfaces shall be free from laitance and loose material and shall show no evidence of a weak surface. Painting on concrete or masonry surfaces shall be delayed as long as practicable within the limits of the Contract. All GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 6 Page 6 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 grease, oil, dust, chemicals, efflorescence and other foreign matter shall be removed. Cracks and other blemishes too large to be covered by the coating shall be patched with compatible materials to the satisfaction of the Architect. Surface projections and mortar splatter shall be leveled by grinding, stoning or scraping. 2. Neutralizer: Masonry surfaces to receive paint shall be tested with phenolphtalien for presence of alkali or active lime. If test indicates their presence, the surface shall be washed down with a neutralizing solution of 3 lbs. of commercial zinc sulphate per gallon of warm water to which has been added a small quantity of water soluble nigroscene to stain the plaster slightly, thus aiding in visual coverage. When dry, the loose crystals shall be brushed off ready for the plaster primer. Neutralizer will not be required if the prescribed test indicates a neutral condition. D. Plaster to Receive Paint: 1. Plaster surfaces shall be free from grit, loose particles and surface irregularities before paint is applied. Plaster surfaces shall be primed with an approved PVA primer or sealer. Cracks and holes shall be repaired with patching plaster (spackled), properly keyed to the existing plaster and sandpapered smooth. E. Wood Surfaces: 1. Knots, pitch streaks, or visible sap spots shall be treated with two (2) coats of shellac. 2. All woodwork that is to be painted shall be primed at earliest possible moment. Back, as well as front, of all millwork coming in contact with masonry walls or plaster walls shall be primed. F. Aluminum surfaces in contact with other materials such as concrete, masonry, steel, wood, etc., shall be given a coat of alkali -resistant bituminous paint. G. Pipe, duct and equipment insulation such as canvas jacket insulation to be painted shall be cleaned of all loose foreign and objectionable material prior to priming. 3.5 SCAFFOLDING A. The painting contractor shall furnish and erect all scaffolding, dropcloths, and other materials necessary for this work, and shall remove same from the premises on completion of the painting Contract. 3.6 SHOP COATS A. Exterior and Interior -Structural: 1. Ferrous Metal: GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 7 Page 7 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 a. 1 coat Shop -Coat Metal Primer, series P14-20 "Red". Use "White" where finish coat is white or light tints; use "Gray" for medium or dark colors. B. Interior: 1. Ferrous Metal including Galvanized Steel: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer series PO4. 3.7 PAINT APPLICATION A. Materials for succeeding coats on any one surface shall be the products of the same manufacturer furnishing the first or primer sealer coat for that particular surface, except where red lead paint or zinc -chromate metal primer is used. B. Samples, approximately 2'-0" square, shall be applied to each type of surface to demonstrate finish color and allow final tint adjustment by Architect. C. Surfaces to be painted shall be free from moisture. All surfaces shall be checked with a moisture meter to determine the moisture content is not greater than 5%. Paint shall be applied by brush, spray or rollers, and unless otherwise approved by the Architect, shall not be applied to any surface when the ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F., or more than 90 degrees F. Each coat of paint shall be thoroughly dry before a following coat is applied. Brushes and paint pails or containers shall be maintained, at all times, free from paint skin, extraneous thinner, adulterant, dirt and other objectionable material. Containers shall not be opened until required for use. Paint shall be thoroughly mixed before application and shall be frequently stirred during application, and the pigment shall be maintained satisfactorily in suspension. Paint shall not be thinned in excess of the printed directions of the manufacturer. Caking or the settling of pigment into a hard mass will be cause for rejection. D. Paint, except paint specified to be applied by spray, shall be brushed, cross -brushed, and laid off uniformly without visible laps, sags, curtains, holidays or objectionable brushmarks. Care shall be exercised so that paint does not splatter on surfaces or fittings not required to be painted. Tarpaulins or other suitable covers (with supports) shall be used to protect adjacent and underlying surfaces. Paint applied or splattered on surfaces not required to be painted shall be promptly removed. E. All primer and intermediate coats of paint shall be unscarred and completely integral at the time of application of each succeeding coat. Sufficient time shall be allowed between coats to ensure proper drying. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 8 Page 8 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 F. All gloss enamel and undercoater shall be sanded prior to the application of succeeding coats. All closets, storage areas, etc., shall be finished the same as adjoining spaces, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Architect. G. The final coat of paint shall match in color, texture and tint the color displays approved by the Architect. H. Wood Finish shall be as follows: Thoroughly sand all surfaces to receive finish. For open grain woods, apply a filler to fill the pores (verify use with Architect prior to use to ascertain desired affect). Apply liberal coat of clear stain. Stain may be thinned up to 25% with mineral spirits. Let penetrate 5 to 10 minutes and wipe off thoroughly. Allow to dry overnight. Sand lightly. Apply oil stain in shade desired to match required finish. Let dry thoroughly. Do not sand. Apply a sealer coat (not a sanding sealer). When dry, steel wool or sand lightly. Apply two coats of clear finish, gloss. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. I. Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy weather, or until surface has thoroughly dried from effects of such weather. Do not varnish or paint when temperature is below 50 degrees F. J. The use of sprayer applicator is prohibited after air-conditioning system is in use. • 3.8 TOUCH-UP • A. Wherever previously primed or painted surfaces have been destroyed or defaced, they shall be restored with materials of like kind. Gouges or scratches in factory - applied finishes shall be filled with suitable fillers and sanded smooth prior to priming and painting. Loose coatings shall be removed and the area shall be feather -edged at least 2" onto firm coatings. Where touch-up to a primed substrate exceeds 35% of the surface to be painted, the surface shall be fully reprimed. Compatibility between field primer and shop or vendor coat shall be verified by field spot testing before proceeding. Cost of touch-up shall be borne by the party responsible, as directed by the General Contractor. 3.9 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall clean up the work as it progresses from day to day, and shall remove therefrom and from the adjoining premises, driveways and streets, all waste materials and rubbish. B. Upon completion of the work, all staging, scaffolding and containers shall be removed from the site. Paint storage areas shall be left in a condition acceptable to the Architect. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 9 Page 9 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 C. Fixtures, frames, escutcheons, cover plates and other similar items, which were removed during the work of this Section, shall be replaced in their original location and condition. D. Misplaced paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left in a condition acceptable to the Architect. E. All paint and other foreign material shall be removed from plumbing fixtures, mechanical equipment, plumbing trim and other miscellaneous items that may have been soiled due to the painting operations. 3.10 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING A. Trade names used herein are only to set a standard of quality desired for type of substrate. Refer to Paragraph 2.02.A. B. Exterior: 1. Exterior Metal (Galvanized): a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec. HP Acrylic Metal Primer series PO4. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel series P28. 2. Exterior Ferrous Metal: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer series PO4. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel series P28. 3. Stucco and Concrete Surfaces: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore High Build Acrylic Masonry Primer series 068. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore Aura Waterborne Exterior Paint series 632/629. 4. Exterior Handrails and Railings: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy high gloss enamel series P42-70. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel series P28. C. Interior: 1. Wood Trim, Wood Doors, Exposed Wood (Scheduled for Clear Finish): a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Benwood series 234, clear. b. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Benwood series 238 (omit for closed grain). c. 2 coats Benjamin Moore Benwood series 422 (sanded). d. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Benwood series 422. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 10 Page 10 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 2. Wood Trim, Wood Doors, Exposed Wood (Scheduled for Stained Finish): a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Benwood series 234. b. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Benwood series 238 (omit for closed grain). c. 2 coats Benjamin Moore Benwood series 422 (sanded). d. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Benwood series 422. 3. Wood Trim, Wood Doors (Scheduled for Paint), Exposed Wood (Not Prefmished) including Plywoods and Exposed Shelves (Paint Finish): a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Fresh Start series 023. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore WB Eco Spec Eggshell series 374. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Fresh Start Primer series 023. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore WB Eco Spec Eggshell series 374. 5. Gypsum Wallboard in Damp Areas; Pre -Op, Recovery, Sterile Corridor, Nurse Stations, Step Down, Exam, Anesthesia Work, and Janitor Closet: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy high gloss enamel series P42-70. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy high gloss enamel series P42/P43. 6. Concrete Block and Concrete: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Latex Block Filler series 285 (concrete block). b. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Fresh Start Primer series 023 (concrete). c. 2 coats Benjamin Moore WB Eco Spec Eggshell series 374. 7. Metal Frames and Doors: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer series PO4. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore WB Eco Spec Interior Semi -Gloss series 376. 8. Steel and Galvanized Metal above Ceiling Line: a. Benjamin Moore Super Spec Sweep -Up Spray series 153. 9. Wood or Plywood Cabinets and Shelves Exposed to View and Scheduled for Paint, Unless Noted Otherwise in Drawings or Specifications: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Fresh Start Primer series 023. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore WB Eco Spec Eggshell series 374. 10. Inside of Cabinets and Shelf Surfaces Not Exposed to View Other than Plastic Laminate Surfaces: a. 2 coats of D.O.F. (Danish Oil Finish). 11. Ferrous Metal Surfaces: a. Shop Coats: All shop coats shall be touched -up with the same kind of paint as the shop coat and allowed to dry before application of finish coats. Any ferrous metal used in the work and not having shop coat shall be given prime coat as specified in addition to shop prime and rust -inhibitive coats specified. All exposed galvanized surfaces shall be painted and shall be considered ferrous metal PO4. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 11 Page 11 r • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 12. Interior Piping: Exposed surfaces, including piping and conduit, shall be color coded as per OSHA requirements. a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer series PO4. b. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel series P28. 13. Machinery and Equipment (Except as Specified in the Mechanical Sections): a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer series PO4. b. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel series P28. 14. Interior Handrails and Railings: a. 1 coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy high gloss enamel series P42-70. b. 2 coats Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Gloss Enamel series P28. 3.11 FURNISH EXTRA PAINT A. This Contractor shall furnish the Owner with full gallon cans of each fmished color and complete manufacturer label and formula, and color chip with manufacturer's color name and/or code. END OF SECTION 09 90 00 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 09 90 00 - 12 Page 12 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Equipment curbs. 5. Sleeves. 6. Formed steel channel. 7. Firestopping relating to HVAC work. 8. Firestopping accessories. 9. Equipment bases and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 099000 - Painting: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 2. Section 232300 - HVAC Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 3. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire -Resistive Joint Systems. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 1 Page 13 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping (Through -Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. B. Surface Burning: ASTM E84, UL 723 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/50. C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. • 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. Firestopping: Conform to applicable code UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 2 Page 14 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 411 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F -Ratings and temperature T -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. 2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F -Ratings and temperature T -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. a. Floor Penetrations within Wall Cavities: T -Rating is not required. B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non -Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories. C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fire Resistant Joints between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. F. Perform Work in accordance with Florida Building Code, Mechanical standards. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years' experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years' experience. 1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 3 Page 15 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING • • A. Material and Equipment: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of fire stopping materials. D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. 1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson Inc... 2. Anvil International, Inc. 3. Flex -Weld, Inc. 4. Michigan Hanger Co. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 — Material and Equipment. B. Refrigerant and Condensate Drain Piping: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 4 Page 16 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, or continuous threaded. 2.3 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.4 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non -fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non -fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially • Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. • C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel. D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood. 2.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non -asbestos fibers. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 5 Page 17 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 2.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non -Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water -stop type wall sleeve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. B. Verify openings are ready to receive fire stopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of fire stopping material. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 6 Page 18 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Install materials to arrest liquid material leakage. D. Obtain permission from General Contractor before using powder -actuated anchors. E. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. 3.3 INSTALLATION — INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME 31.9, and ASTM F708. B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 7 Page 19 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 H. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 099000. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. 3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 6 inches thick and extending 4 inches beyond supported equipment. B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members formed steel channel steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 3.6 INSTALLATION — SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.7 INSTALLATION — FIRESTOPPING A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring fire stopping. B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 8 Page 20 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating. D. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials. E. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. F. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray, bus, cable bus, conduit, wire way, trough penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Non -Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non -fire rated wall, partition floor, ceiling, and roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non -fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 3. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at telecommunication rooms and electrical rooms. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contract Closeout: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 9 Page 21 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 3.9 CLEANING A. Section Contract Closeout: Requirements for cleaning. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section Contract Closeout: Requirements for protecting finished Work. 1. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION 23 05 29 • • GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 29 - 10 Page 22 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vibration isolators. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and: 1. ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 hp, plus connected piping and ductwork when motor and drive assembly are not internally isolated. • 1.4 SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: Submit schedule of vibration isolator type. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and setting dimensions. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years' experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Mason Industries 2. Kinetics B. Spring Hanger: 1. Spring Isolators: a. Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 48 - 1 Page 23 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolator's rubber hanger with threaded insert. 4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. C. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Rubber or neoprene -waffle pads. a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum 1/2 inch thick. c. Maximum loading 40 psi. d. Height of ribs: not to exceed 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: Single layer. 1/2 inch thick waffle pads bonded each side of 1/4 inch thick steel plate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify equipment, ductwork and piping is installed before work in this section is started. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Adjust equipment level. B. Install spring hangers without binding. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections. 3.4 ISOLATOR SCHEDULE ITEM ISOLATOR TYPE Condensing Units Neoprene Pad Isolators Air Handling Units Neoprene Pad Isolators END OF SECTION 23 05 48 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 48 - 2 Page 24 • 1.3 SUBMITTALS Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Pipe markers. 4. Ceiling tacks. 5. Labels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 099000 - Painting: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. • A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 017000 - Contract Closeout: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 53 - 1 Page 25 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 . 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS • A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years' experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years' experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems. 2. Brimar Pipe Markers. 3. Seton Identification Products 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 — Material and Equipment. B. Product Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Metal Tags: 1. Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter rectangular with finished edges. B. Information Tags: 1. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. C. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location plastic laminated. 2.3 PIPE MARKERS • A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 53 - 2 Page 26 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. 2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. 3. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.4 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color -coded head. B. Color code as follows: 1. HVAC equipment: Yellow. 2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red. 3. Plumbing valves: Green. 4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue. 2.5 LABELS A. Description: Aluminum, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. D. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. E. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water 1111 treatment devices with plastic nameplates. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 53 - 3 Page 27 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify air terminal units with numbered tags. H. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. Verify final locations of exposed tags with architect. J. Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. K. Provide ceiling tacks to locate dampers above access panels. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 53 - 4 Page 28 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems. 2. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 3. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions. 4. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council: 1. AABC MN -1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems. C. Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau: 1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument. C. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN -1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms. Data shall be presented in Imperial Units. D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. E. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty and Copy of NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification. F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 93 - 1 Page 29 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 G. Furnish reports in soft cover, letter size, 3 -ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 017000 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN -1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC and NEBB. B. Agencies: 1. Southern Independent Testing Agency. 2. The Phoenix Agency. 3. Spectech C. Perform Work under supervision of registered professional engineer experienced in performance of this Work and licensed located in State of Florida. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of life safety system 4111 with Fire Authority. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 93 - 2 Page 30 r • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following: 1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 5 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 5 percent of design. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 93 - 3 Page 31 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 D. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance. E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner. 3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum airflow rate, full cooling, and at minimum airflow rate, full heating. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 93 - 4 Page 32 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 K. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to obtain required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near building entries. 3.6 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: 1. Air Cooled Condensing Units. 2. Air Coils. 3. Air Handling Units. 4. Air Inlets and Outlets. B. Report Forms 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude j. Report date 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 4. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame c. HP/BHP and kW d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM f. Service factor GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 93 - 5 Page 33 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 g. Starter size, rating, heater elements h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5. V -Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 6. Air Cooled Condenser: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Manufacturer d. Model number e. Serial number f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual h. Number of compressors 7. Cooling Coil Data: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual j. Air pressure drop, design and actual 8. Electric Duct Heater: a. Manufacturer b. Identification/number c. Location d. Model number e. Design kW f. Number of stages g. Phase, voltage, amperage h. Test voltage (each phase) i. Test amperage (each phase) j. Air flow, specified and actual k. Temperature rise, specified and actual 9. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 93 - 6 Page 34 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Return air flow, specified and actual h. Outside air flow, specified and actual i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual j. Inlet pressure k. Discharge pressure 1. Sheave Make/Size/Bore m. Number of Belts/Make/Size n. Fan RPM 10. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Outside air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature 1. Design outside/return air ratio m. Actual outside/return air ratio 11. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor k. Leakage 12. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 93 - 7 Page 35 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 END OF SECTION 23 05 93 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 05 93 - 8 Page 36 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping system insulation. 2. Pipe insulation jackets. 3. Insulation accessories including vapor retarders and accessories. 4. Ductwork insulation. 5. Ductwork insulation jackets. 6. Insulation accessories including vapor retarders and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product and Execution requirements for inserts at hanger locations. 2. Section 230553- Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for HVAC piping and equipment identification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 2. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 3. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 4. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 5. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 6. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 7. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 9. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 10. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 11. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 07 00 - 1 Page 37 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors': 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013400 — Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Material and Equipment: Requirements for transporting, handling, storaging, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 07 00 - 2 Page 38 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Contract Closeout: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens Coming. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Knauf. B. Insulation: ASTM C553 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications, Type II. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with two coats of vapor barrier mastic and glass tape. D. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1 Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. 2.2 MINERAL FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens Corning. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Knauf. B. Insulation: ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Insulation, Type IA C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm. 3. Secure with two coats of vapor barrier mastic and glass tape. D. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight, glass fabric. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 07 00 - 3 Page 39 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM A. Manufacturers: 1. Armacel. B. Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular form: ASTM C534; Type I, Tubular form C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: 1. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 2.4 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A. Aluminum Pipe Jacket: 1. ASTM B209. 2. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet. 3. Finish: Embossed. 4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. B. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. C. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. D. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 07 00 - 4 Page 40 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1. Furnish aluminum jacket and fittings for piping. • E. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate. F. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. G. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement. H. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system. I. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. J. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over. K. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. L. Ductwork Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canvas jacket. M. Provide mechanical insulation fasteners for rectangular duct over 22 inches wide. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Cooling Systems: 1. Refrigerant Piping: a. Elastomeric Cellular Foam 1) Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils: a. Elastomeric Cellular Foam 1) Thickness: 3/4 inch. B. Plenums: 1. Rigid Glass Fiber Insulation: 1-1/2 thick. C. Supply, Return and Outside Air Ducts: (Concealed): 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation: 1-1/2 inch thick GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 07 00 - 5 Page 41 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 D. Supply, Return and Outside Air Ducts (Exposed): 1. Rigid Glass Fiber Insulation: 1-1/2 inch thick END OF SECTION 23 07 00 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 07 00 - 6 Page 42 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Condenser water piping, above grade. 2. Condensate Drains. 3. Unions and flanges. 4. Valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230533 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section. 2. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for Piping In- sulation for placement by this section. 3. Section 232116 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product and execution re- quirements for piping specialties used in heating and cooling piping sys- tems. • 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 2. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 3. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 4. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 5. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Tempera- ture Service. 3. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 4. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 5. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 6. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Weld- ing. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 21 13 - 1 Page 43 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 110 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. • • D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manu- facturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 4. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible sys- tem components and joints. Use non -conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems. B. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus con- nections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus. C. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. D. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and rat- ings for each service. B. Test Reports: Indicate results of piping system pressure test. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures and isolation. D. Welders' Certificate: Include welders' certification of compliance with ASME Section IX. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 21 13 - 2 Page 44 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, equipment and ac- cessories. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and chang- ing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS • A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. • B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, com- pleting sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.11 WARRANTY B. Contract Closeout: Product warranties and product bonds. C. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 21 13 - 3 Page 45 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDENSER WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade B, Schedule 40. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inches and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger. 2.2 CONDENSATE DRAIN A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought cop- per. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. 2.3 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with brazed joints. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 2.4 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane Valve, North America. 2. Hammond Valve. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company. 4. NIBCO, Inc. 5. Stockham Valves & Fittings. B. 3 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, two piece bronze body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with un- ion, locking lever handle with balancing stops. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 21 13 - 4 Page 46 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with tempo- rary plugs or caps. E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. 3.2 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install condenser water piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 B. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. F. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 230553. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. I. Slope hydronic piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe aligned. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. K. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish paint- ing. L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. M. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 232300. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 21 13 - 5 Page 47 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • I A. Test condenser water piping system in accordance with ASME B31.9 B. Hydronic piping systems shall be tested hydrostatically at one half times the max- imum system design pressure, but not less than 100 psi. The duration of each test shall not be less than 15 minutes. END OF SECTION 23 21 13 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 21 13 - 6 Page 48 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 23 00 HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Refrigerant piping. 2. Condensate Piping. 3. Unions. 4. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators. 5. Refrigerant filter -driers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports, sleeves, and firestopping for placement by this section. 2. Section 230553- Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section. 3. Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for placement by this section. • 1.2 REFERENCES I A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 710 - Liquid -Line Driers. 2. ARI 730 - Flow -Capacity Rating and Application of Suction -Line Filters and Filter Dryers. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B 16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 3. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 4. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 2. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 3. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 23 00 - 1 Page 49 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 E. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS DI.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non -conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. 2. Refrigerant Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity, component sizes, rough -in requirements, and service sizes for the following: a. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators. b. Refrigerant filter -driers. C. Test Reports: Indicate results of piping system pressure test. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation of refrigerant piping systems. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 23 00 - 2 Page 50 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product Requirements. B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. 1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. 1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two refrigerant filter -dryer cartridges of each type. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 23 00 - 3 Page 51 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.26 cast copper, compression type. 2. Joints: Flared. 2.2 CONDENSATE DRAIN A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. 2.3 UNIONS A. 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.4 REFRIGERANT MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. B. Indicators: 1. Port: Single, UL listed. 2. Body: Copper or brass, flared or solder ends. 3. Sight glass: Color -coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap. 4. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig 5. Maximum working temperature: 200 degrees F. 2.5 REFRIGERANT FILTER -DRIERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 23 00 - 4 Page 52 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. • • B. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: 1. Shell: ARI 710, UL listed, brass, removable cap, for maximum working pressure of 500 psig 2. Filter/Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve with activated alumina. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than two ft of cover. B. Establish minimum separation from other services and piping in accordance with F.B.C. C. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly. D. Excavate pipe trench. E. Install pipe within a continuous Schedule 40 PVC sleeve turned up to above grade and finished floor surface. F. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide a uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density. G. Install pipe and PVC sleeve on prepared bedding. H. Route pipe in straight line. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 23 00 - 5 Page 53 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density. 3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 612 inches minimum cover over top of PVC sleeve. Compact to 95 percent maximum density. 4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material. 5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping. 3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 15061. E. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 15076. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow. H. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing. I. Insulate piping; refer to Section 230700. J. Provide replaceable cartridge filter -dryers, with isolation valves and bypass with valve. K. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. L. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. M. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 23 00 - 6 Page 54 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 3.5 INSTALLATION - REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES • • A. Refrigerant Liquid Indicators: 1. Install line size liquid indicators in main liquid line downstream of condenser. 2. Install line size liquid indicators downstream of liquid solenoid valves. B. Filter -Dryers: 1. Install permanent filter -dryer in systems containing hermetic compressors. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch. C. Repair leaks. D. Retest until no leaks are detected. END OF SECTION 23 23 00 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 23 00 - 7 Page 55 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Flexible connectors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Flexible connectors. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Special fittings. 2. Manual -volume damper installations. 3. Fire -damper and combination fire- and smoke -damper installations, including sleeves and duct -mounting access doors. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling -mounting items. Show ceiling -mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. IIII 2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 33 00 - 1 Page 56 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Complying with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2 -3/4 -inch- wide, 0.028 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 -inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. /sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. 2.3 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of Pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 33 00 - 2 Page 57 • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff. E. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. F. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." G. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. H. For fans developing static pressures of 5 -inch w.g. and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. I. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts as detailed on the drawings. J. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 ADJUSTING • A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. • B. Final positioning of manual -volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." END OF SECTION 23 33 00 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 33 00 - 3 Page 58 • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Air handling unit. 2. Condensing unit. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 232300 - HVAC Piping: Execution requirements for connection to refrigerant piping specified by this section. 2. Section 233300 - Duct Accessories: Flexible connections. 3. Division 26. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 2. ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air -Conditioning Condensing Units. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air - Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 26 - 1 Page 59 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 3. Weights. 4. Rough -in connections and connection requirements. 5. Duct connections. 6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 7. Controls. 8. Accessories. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements: Energy Efficiency Rating (SEER) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with compressors and evaporator coils when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240. B. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240. C. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270. D. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 26 - 2 Page 60 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 • 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. C. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of condensing units with roof structure. B. Coordinate installation of air handling units with building structure. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for compressors. • 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish one set for each unit filters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS • A. Manufacturers: 1. The Trane Company. B. Product Description: Split system consisting of air handling unit and condensing unit including cabinet, evaporator fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser, air filters, controls, air handling unit accessories, condensing unit accessories, and refrigeration specialties. 2.2 AIR HANDLING UNIT A. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. B. Cabinet: 1. Panels: Constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel finish. Access Panels: Located on both sides of unit. Furnish with duct collars on inlets and outlets. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 26 - 3 Page 61 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 2. Insulation: Factory applied to each surface to insulate entire cabinet. %2" inch thick foil faced fiberglass. C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, direct drive resiliently mounted with direct drive electronically communicated motor. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. D. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Factory leak tested under water. Removable, PVC construction, double -sloped drain pan with piping connections on both sides. E. Refrigeration System: Single refrigeration circuits controlled by factory installed thermal expansion valve. F. Air Filters: 1 inch MERV 13 efficiency based on ASHRAE 52.1.] 2.3 CONDENSING UNIT A. General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing units, consisting of casing, compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. B. Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for components and controls, and complete with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. C. Compressor: Single refrigeration circuit with 2 stage scroll compressor, resiliently mounted, with positive lubrication, and internal motor overload protection. D. Condenser Coil: Constructed of copper tubing mechanically bonded to copper fins, factory leak and pressure tested. E. Controls: Furnish operating and safety controls including high and low pressure cutouts. Control transformer. Furnish magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors. F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced. Wired to operate with compressor. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in thermal overload protection. [Furnish high efficiency fan motors.] G. Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories: 1. Anti -short cycle timer. 2. Disconnect switch. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 26 - 4 Page 62 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 3. Coil and cabinet with corrosion resistant coating capable of withstanding salt spray test of 10.000 hours in accordance with ASTM B117. 4. Condenser Coil Guard: Condenser fan openings furnished with PVC coated steel wire safety guards. 5. Suction and discharge pressure gauges. H. Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following: 1. Charge of compressor oil. 2. Holding charge of refrigerant. 3. Replaceable core type filter drier. 4. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. 5. Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping. 6. Charging valve. 7. Oil level sight glass. I. Refrigerant: Furnish charge of refrigerant R -410A. 2.4 NON -ZONING CONTROLS A. Thermostat: 7 day programmable electronic space thermostat automatic changeover and heating setback and cooling setup capability. Furnish system selector switch off -heat -auto -cool and fan control switch, auto -on. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify concrete pad for condensing unit is ready for unit installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION - AIR HANDLING UNIT A. Connect air handling units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. Refer to Section 233300. B. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. 3.3 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT A. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install refrigerant specialties specified in Section 232300. B. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant. C. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 26 - 5 Page 63 Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 D. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories. 3.4 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. B. Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate air handling unit operation and maintenance. B. Demonstrate starting, maintenance, and operation of condensing unit. C. Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not operate air handling units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, 41 bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. • END OF SECTION 23 8126 GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 26 - 6 Page 64 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 SECTION 23 81 46 WATER -SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontally mounted water source heat pumps. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for vibration isolators installed by this section. 2. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Water and drain piping connections. 3. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Flexible connections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 260 - Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment. 2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. ARI 320 - Water Source Heat Pump Equipment. 4. ARI 350 - Sound Rating of Non -Ducted Indoor Air Conditioning Equipment. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air -Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL 1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Coefficient of Performance (COP), heat pump, heating - Ratio of rate of heat delivered to rate of energy input, in consistent units, for complete heat pump system, including compressor and, if applicable, auxiliary heat, under designated operating conditions. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 46 - 1 Page 65 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 B. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) - Ratio of net cooling capacity in Btuh to total rate of electric input in watts under designated operating conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Rough -in connections and connection requirements. 4. Duct connections. 5. Controls. 6. Accessories. 7. Installation, operation and service clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center of gravity. 8. Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights. 9. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection points. Include recommended wire and fuse sizes or maximum circuit ampacity. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. Include parts list and wiring diagrams. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage. B. Comply with manufacturers installation instructions for rigging, unloading and transporting units. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 46 - 2 Page 66 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 C. Protect units from damage by storing [in manufacturer's packaging] [off site] until ready for installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for compressors. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one set of filters for each unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. The Trane Company. 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Configuration: Horizontal configuration. C. Cabinet: Factory assembled and wired consisting of galvanized steel cabinet with 1/2 inch thick glass fiber insulation on interior, discharge duct collar and return collar with filter rack. 1. Hanging Brackets: Located at each corner, and capable of receiving vibration isolation. D. Motor and Fan Assembly - 1/2 ton to 5 ton: 1. Drive: Direct type. 2. Motor: Three speed high efficiency permanent split capacitor with permanently lubricated and sealed bearings and internal thermal overload protection. a. Furnish high external static pressure motors as indicated on Drawings. 3. Fan Discharge: Field convertible for back, left, or right discharge. 4. Motor and fan wheel: Removable. E. Motor and Fan Assembly - 12-1/2 ton to 25 ton: 1. Drive: Belt type with adjustable sheaves. 2. Provide access to blower motor and motor belt or drive assembly through back or side panels. F. Air -to -Refrigerant Coil: 1. Constructed of copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins; leak tested at 450 psi operating pressure; tubes completely evacuated of air prior to shipment. 2. Refrigerant coil distributor assembly: orifice style with round copper distributor tubes sized consistent with capacity of coil; suction headers fabricated from rounded copper pipe. GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 46 - 3 Page 67 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 G. Drain Pan: Constructed of corrosion resistant material and insulated to prevent sweating. Bottom sloped in two directions. H. Water -to -Refrigerant Heat Exchanger: 1. Co -axial type; constructed of copper; fluted to enhance heat transfer and minimize fouling and scaling. 2. Working pressure: 450 psi on refrigerant side and 400 psi on water side. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressor: Rotary, reciprocating, or scroll type. Furnish with: a. External vibration isolation. b. Thermal overload protection. 2. Reversing Valve: Pilot operating sliding piston type with replaceable encapsulated magnetic coil. Valve energized in cooling mode. 3. Refrigerant Tubing: Constructed of copper; free from contaminants and conditions such as drilling fragments, dirt, and oil. 4. Insulation: Refrigerant and water piping internal to unit insulated with 3/8 inch thick elastomeric insulation. 5. Refrigerant Metering: Furnish with thermal expansion valve (TXV). Capillary tubes may be used only when unit is furnished with water -regulating valve. J. Filters: 1 inch thick throwaway type 25 to 30 percent efficiency based on ASHRAE 52.1. K. Control Panel: Factory tested and installed containing devices to allow heating and cooling operation to occur from remote device. Furnish the following: 1. 24 volt AC contactor for compressor control. 2. Terminal strip. 3. Safety lockout relay to prevent cycling of compressor during adverse conditions of operation. Capable of being reset at remote thermostat or zone sensor or by cycling power to unit. 4. High pressure switch. 5. Low pressure switch. L. Controls: Furnish units with the following: 1. 24 volt AC control transformer with integral circuit breaker. 2. Condensate overflow sensor. 3. Thermostat: [Manual changeover] [Automatic changeover] [Programmable] with [one] [two] stage of heat and [one] [two] stage of cooling, system off -auto switch and fan on -auto switch. [Heating night setback and override switch.] [LED for fault.] M. Hydronic Piping Specialties: Furnish unit with the following: 1. Ball Valves: Brass body, memory, memory stop, and pressure temperature ports. 2. Strainers: Bronze body, Y type configuration with stainless steel strainer screen. 3. Hoses: For supply and return connections. Constructed of stainless steel outer braid with inner core of tube made of nontoxic synthetic polymer material. Suitable for water temperatures ranging between 33 degrees F and 211 degrees F. 4. Supply and Return Hose Kit Assembly: For supply and return connections. Hose constructed of stainless steel outer braid with inner core of tube made of nontoxic GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 46 - 4 Page 68 • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Phase II GEI Project #17071 July 27, 2017 synthetic polymer material. Suitable for water temperatures ranging between 33 degrees F and 211 degrees F. Includes ball valve with pressure temperature plug ports, flexible stainless steel hose with swivel and nipple. N. Automatic Flow Devices: Automatic self -balancing device to limit flow rate within 10 percent of scheduled flow rate, over 40 to 1 differential pressure operating range of 2 psi to 80 psi differential. Operating temperature range: from freezing to 225 degrees F. Furnish with dual pressure -temperature test ports. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify piping rough -in is at correct location. B. Verify electrical rough -in is at correct location. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units on vibration isolators. Refer to Section 23 05 48. B. Connect units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. Refer to Section 23 33 00. C. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges. D. Install hydronic piping accessories on condenser water piping furnished with unit. 3.3 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. B. Touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. C. Install new throwaway filters in units at Substantial Completion. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished surfaces of cabinets with protective covers during remainder of construction. END OF SECTION GRINER ENGINEERING INC. 23 81 46 - 5 Page 69 D U Pr- • ST Id I ARURGTON CLEARWATER BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH SCHEMATIC DOCUMENTS SPECTRUM FIELD HVAC RENOVATIONS -PHASE II —P• TR ,. RRAI/GEit pR rigUtE '8 I AMIA ArR I . I < LOI1FJ A LA I � EUAnouP SPECT UM FIELD EASINOOD Re PCTI a� \. F 604 OLD COACHMAN ROAD NORTH CLEARWATER, FL 33765 PROJECT NUMBER 16- 0023 -PR -B DATE: JULY 2017 SCOPE OF WORK: THIS PROJECT WILL INCLUDE THE REPLACEMENT OF 23 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS, 4 SPLIT SYSTEMS AND ASSOCIATED THERMOSTATS AND THE ADDITION OF 2 SPLIT SYSTEMS. DRAWING INDEX: MECHANICAL DRAWINGS M001 MECHANICAL LEGEND SHEET M101A MECHANICAL LOWER LEVEL REPLACEMENT PLAN M101B MECHANICAL LOWER LEVEL REPLACEMENT PLAN M101C MECHANICAL LOWER LEVEL REPLACEMENT PLAN M102 MECHANICAL CONCOURSE REPLACEMENT PLAN M103 MECHANICAL THIRD FLOOR REPLACEMENT PLAN M201 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M202 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M301 MECHANICAL DETAILS CITY OFFICIALS GEORGE N. CRETEKOS DOREEN HOCK — DIPOLITO DR. BOB CUNDIFF BILL JOHNSON HOYT HAMILTON WILLIAM B. HORNE II MAYOR COUNCILMEMBER COUNCILMEMBER COUNCILMEMBER COUNCILMEMBER CITY MANAGER KEVIN E. DUNBAR MICHAEL D. QUILLEN, P.E. CITY ENGINEER APPROVED BY DATE APPROVED DIRECTOR PARKS & RECREATION DEPT. • • .7-241P 7. BIDDING SET JULY 2017 DATE. JULY 2U. DRAWING No Cs IN GRINER GRINER ENGINEERING, INC. 1628 Firs Avenue North St. Peteaburg. Florioa 33713 Phone: (7271- 822 - 2335 Fax 1f/2�/�1E-A8�2,;1 -3��3y6�1,, Certificate oyt9ig iAtt •i 3' 73 Date 07/20/17 Drown MS D f1eo MS FOR JHG Job no 1707'' CITY OFFICIALS GEORGE N. CRETEKOS DOREEN HOCK — DIPOLITO DR. BOB CUNDIFF BILL JOHNSON HOYT HAMILTON WILLIAM B. HORNE II MAYOR COUNCILMEMBER COUNCILMEMBER COUNCILMEMBER COUNCILMEMBER CITY MANAGER KEVIN E. DUNBAR MICHAEL D. QUILLEN, P.E. CITY ENGINEER APPROVED BY DATE APPROVED DIRECTOR PARKS & RECREATION DEPT. • • .7-241P 7. BIDDING SET JULY 2017 DATE. JULY 2U. DRAWING No Cs HVAC SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION _87(12 �? EXISTING CFWOR REMAIN SIZE IN INCHES (PLGUAN DiM. K FIRTO ST) /� NK) ROUND DUCT DOWN c' _ _ _ EXISTING DUCTWORK/EQUIPMENT ELBOW - TURNED DOWN ROUND DUCT UP OEM EXISTNC REMOVED DAND UCTWREPLACED ORK/EQUPMCNT TO RE ®' GOOSENECK S--'5 NEW FLEXIBLE DUCT O ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN ,..... NEW DUCTSOX DUCTWORK Q DTi1WELL TEE - OUTLET DOWN -+- NESTED SOL.IARE/RECTANGUJIR BRANCH TAKE OFF '� DUCT ACCESS DOOR SP y' SPIN -IN FIRING WITH VOLUME DAMPER ♦, COMBINATION FARE /SMOKE DAMPER (VERTICAL POSITION) UNION r. t ��---- yy____4_� SPIN-IN FIRING WITHOUT VOLUME DAMPER lFD FIRE DAMPER (VERTICAL POSIT ON) COMPRESSED MR PIPING t'-'I + T�---- ��4-- -�-�ii _ FIRE DAMPER DUCT TRANS TION (RECTANGLE TO RECTANGLE) MECHANICAL CCMRAC-OR FIRE DAMPER (HORIZONTAL POSITION) we MSS ROUND) ANS'TO\ (RECTANGLE TO 1' MOTORIZ VOLUME DAMPER IN ` L ? DUCT LEE WI "i TURN NG MMES UNIFORM BUILDING CODE MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER II DUCTWORK m 1 4, F'—!1Z DUCT ELBOW LP CHILLED WATER RETURN PIPING DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR .r. 2 r :ej DUCT ELBOW DOWN CHILLED WATER SUPPI Y PIPING SIDEIYALL RETURN GRILLE 4' I -•. -- AUTOMATIC AIR VENT - xw I---YJ 90' ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES FEET PER MINUTE 4' 4. I - SIDEWALL SUPPLY GRILLE HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM SUPPLY PIPING FT _ 90 RAD US ELBOW R- 1.5W) ( FC -y ,M11:, I F:E7DBLE DUCT CONNECTOR —A v— 4S BRANCH TAKE -OFF WITH VOLUME DAMPER 6 5, z CEILING DIFFUSER (SUPPI Y, RETURN. & EXHAUST) GA 5A. R.A. EXH. m ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER NT I- 71 r7 S.A. R.A. EXH. EXISTING CEILING DIFFUSER (SUPPLY. RETURN, & EXHAUST) EDi -T As UNDER CUT DOOR (INCHES .GNFM) AD -1 •m 1X7 AIR DEVICE IDENTIFICATION AIRFLOW NECK SIZE — SUPPLY AIRFLOW DIRECTION GPH NEW CONNECTION TO EXISTING -I- EXHAUST /RETURN AIRFLOW DIRECTION VAV THERMOSTAT (Mm. 4' -0' AFL) 0 KEYED NOTE QS SENSOR (1.1-0. 4' -0' APE) 9 HUIAIDISTAT ® HEAT DETECTOR © HVAC EQUIPMENT CONTROL d CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR ® STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR BRITISH THERMAL UNIT HR ® CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR HVAC PIPING AND VALVES LEGEND SYMBOL ABBREVIATION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION 0— ELBOW -TUNED U' ( TRIPLE DUTY VALVE (SHUT -OFF, BALANCING & CHECK) AMERICAN WITH DISABIImES ACT ELBOW - TURNED DOWN �-- BALL VALVE C— 0 PIPE RISER - AU T0 CIRWT SETTER VALVE -O- TEE - OUTLET U' -- HORIZONTAL SWING CHECK VALVE 5. -C. TEE - OUTLET DOWN -+- Y -TYPE STRAINER WITH SLOW DOWN AND VALVE LINT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SP HOF BASKET TYPE STRAINER ABOVE FINISHED ROOF -ill-- UNION MBH THOUSANDS OF BTU PER HOUR 5S CONCENTRIC INCREASER AMU COMPRESSED MR PIPING A FIRE DAMPER ECCENTRIC REDUCER MECHANICAL CCMRAC-OR CONDENSER WATER RETURN PIPING we MSS FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR FD CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY PIPING ws VNMUM CIRCUIT AMPS THERMOMETER UNIFORM BUILDING CODE CONDENSATE PIPING m !� i/ PRESSURE GAGE MOCP CHILLED WATER RETURN PIPING —AN P/T PRESSURE/TENPERATURE PLUG AMERICAN SOCIETY O HEATING, REFRIGERATION, & AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS CHILLED WATER SUPPI Y PIPING —awa NC AUTOMATIC AIR VENT - xw HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM RETURN PIPING PPM FEET PER MINUTE 4' MANUAL AR VENT MR HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM SUPPLY PIPING FT _ FEET -al- VENTUR FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICE —A v— FUET GAS PIPING -11-1-- BUTTERFLY VALVE GA REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DISCHARGE PIP NG m � MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVE (BUTTERFLY VENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM RETURN PIPING (SUCTION) As NO AL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SUPPLY PIPING (LOUD) VOLTS ASPE AMERICAN SOCIETY' OF PLUMBING ENGINEERS GPH GALLONS PER HOUR NTS NOT TO SCALE VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME GPM GALL ONS PER MINUTE OA OUTSIDE AR vs VACUUM BREAKER BHP BRAKE HORSE POWER HP HORSEPOWER PC HVAC GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE REGUIRFMENTS OF THE FLORIDA BUIUNU COVE F F IH EDITON 2014 - MECHANICAL. NATIONAL ELECTR C CODE. NSA AND ALL LOCAL ORDINANCES. 2. ALL WORK SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECTURAL CVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 3. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT CELNG GRID AND DIFFJSER LOCATIONS. 4. PRIOR "C SUBMITTING A BID, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE STUDIED AND COMPARED THE CONTRACT DOC -MEATS WITH EXISTING/PROPOSED CONDITIONS AND NOT LATER THAN -EN (10) DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID OPENING SHALL REPORT 10 IHE ENGINEER ANY ERROR. INCONSISTENCY, OR OMISSION IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 5. PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONNECTION FROM EACH DUCTWORK CONNECTION TO AN MOVING EQUIPMENT. B. ALL DUCTS SHOWN ARE INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSIONS. 7. LOCATE ALL SENSORS 48` AFF UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. EXACT LOCATION OF ALL THERMOSTATS SHALL BF APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT ANU IHE ENGINEER AND OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. E. CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN ALL COILS AND RE'LACE ALL FILTERS AND BELTS AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. 9. MR COWIIIJNINO EQUIPMENT SHALL BE AS SPECIE ED. ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER WILL REVIEW ANY SUBSTITUTION FOR COMPATIBUTY. 10. DUCT SIZES AND ECUIPMENT OPENINGS THRU ROOTS, SLABS AND WALL PARTITIONS SHALL SUIT EQUIPMENT FURNISHED SEE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS. 11. PROVIDE 'P' TRAP AT AIR HANDLER UNITS PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 12. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL PIPING PASSING THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS AND ROOF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 13. ALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIR WCRK SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OR THE TRADE INVOLVED. 14. THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE FOR THE DUCTWORK IS 2N. 15. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS FOR HVAC LOU PARENT AND DUCTWORK SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE ENGINEERS AP'ROVAL. THE ENGINEER MAY REQUIRE THE CONTRACTOR TO REDO ANY WORK. WHICH WAS NOT APPROVED, OR THE ENGINEER MAY REQUIRE A CRECIT TO THE OWNER. PROVIDE A SET OF AS -RU LIS AFTER THE JOT S COMPLETED. THIS SET SHALL BE CONTINUOUSLY JPDATED DURING CONSTRUCTOR. A. 'ROV DE AIR TURNNG VANES AT ALL 90- DEGREE ELBOWS. 'ROY GE W UME DAMPERS Al SO- BRANCH TAKEOFF AS NDICATEJ IN THE SMACNA 'HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTOR STANDARDS'. 17. PROVIDE FLIER RACKS WHICH ARE ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE AND SEALED MR TIGH- T 8. CONTRACTOR SHALL L NSTALL HVAC ST510M5 AS REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ENGINEER TO INSURE QUIET OPERAIDN. NO UNDUE VIBRATION OR SOUND SHALL BE TRANSMTTED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE AND OCCUPIED AREAS. IF THE EQUIPMENT NSTAJ.ED HAS A HIGHER SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL THAN THE EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED, THEN T WILL BE THE CONTRACTORS AND THE NA4LFAC ORES RESPONSIBILITY TO ELIMINATE ANY ADDmONAL NOISE TRANSMISSION. NOTE: SOME SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS SHOWN MAY NOT PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. ELECTRICAL LOAD SUMMARY PANEL 513 R A 400 Alp 480/277 3 PHASE WITH MI MOW ESTIMATED DEMAND LOAD OF 222 AMPS, THE NLW 'ANEL LOAD WITH THE NEW LINTS IS 252 AMPS. CHANGES N T-E REMANNG SCOPE CE THIS WORK ARE MAR3NAL AND THEY WERE NOT CONSIDERED ON THIS LOW SUMMARY. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO ACT AS THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR THIS PROJECT AND TO INCLUDE ALL OVERSIGHT AS SUCH. ALL SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR'S BID. w«maIM AAA JUL 2 1 2117 .I EA H. KLrxa1 NI, P E. R. 39181 17 A HV /AC REPLACEMENT-PHASE II SPECTRUM FIELD CITY OFCLEARWATER, FLORIDA CGMMACXM WAMAMM OM VI ALAS REV PTV JHG W ft0xa wuelI 17071 GOT JUL' 20, 2017 sF*ISSUED FM M001 HVAC ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ADA AMERICAN WITH DISABIImES ACT ENS EN I ERING WEI BULB TEMPERATURE LRA _.. LOCKED ROTOR AMPS SMACNA SHEET METAL & MR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSUCWION AFL. ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ST ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE MB B LEAVING WET BULB TEMPERATURE 5. -C. ABOVE FINISHED GRADE RE Fl ORIDA BUILDING CODE LINT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SP STATIC PRESSURE AFR ABOVE FINISHED ROOF FCL FAN COIL UNIT MBH THOUSANDS OF BTU PER HOUR 5S SANITARY SEWER STACK AMU AIR- HLANDLNG UNIT FD FIRE DAMPER MC MECHANICAL CCMRAC-OR TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE MSS AMERICAN NATIONAL. STANDARDS NSRRRE FD FLOOR DRAIN MCA VNMUM CIRCUIT AMPS UBC UNIFORM BUILDING CODE AP ACCESS PANEL FU FULL LOAD AMPS MOCP MAXIMUM OVER CURRENT PROTECTION UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES ASHRAE AMERICAN SOCIETY O HEATING, REFRIGERATION, & AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS F, P.C. FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR NC NORMALLY CLOSED UMC UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE PPM FEET PER MINUTE NEC NATIONAL ELECTRIC CORE TON UNLESS OTHERWSE NOTED FT _ FEET NEPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION UPC UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE ASME AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS GA GALLONS MC NOT N CONTRACT V VENT G.C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR NO NORMALLY OPEN V VOLTS ASPE AMERICAN SOCIETY' OF PLUMBING ENGINEERS GPH GALLONS PER HOUR NTS NOT TO SCALE VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME GPM GALL ONS PER MINUTE OA OUTSIDE AR vs VACUUM BREAKER BHP BRAKE HORSE POWER HP HORSEPOWER PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR VFD VARIABLE FREQJENCT DRIVE BTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT HR HOUR PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH NF VERIFY IN TIELD BTUH CFM BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR CUBE FEET HSPF HEATING SEASON PERFORMANCE FACTOR 'SIG POUNDS PER SQUARE INCA-GAUGE VW VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW CO PER MINUTE CLEAN OUT HVAC HEATING. VENTIATION, & AIR CONDmoMNG PTAC PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONER VFW VARIABLE 7EFRIG =RANT VOLUME PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE VS VENT STACK COP COEFFICIENT OF PERFORMANCE 112 HERTZ CPVC CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RA RETURN AIR VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF CU IBC INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE RO ROOF DRAIN CONDENSING UNIT IECC INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE RLA RATED LOAD AMPS TRH 'URGENT RELATIVE HI-MIDDY DDC ERECT DERAIL` CONTROLS RO ROOF OVERFLOW AP CHANCE IN PRESSURE_ CIA. DIAMETER IMO INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE RPBFP REDUCED PRESSURE BACKELOW PREVENTER AT CHANGE IN TEMPERATURE EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE IPC INTERNATIONAL PLUMB CODE 'C DEGREES CELCIUS EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IPLV INTEGRATED PAST -LOAD VAL OF RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE 'F DEGREES CDB ENTERING DRY BULB TEMPERATURE KW KLOWATTS RTJ ROOF TOP UNIT 'K FAHRENHEIT FFR ESP ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO LAY LEAVING MR TEMPERATURE SA SUPPLY MR 'R DEGREES KELVI N DEGREES RANKIN EXTERNAL STATE PRESSURE LB POUNDS FORCE SC SITE CONTRACTOR 'WC INCHES WATER COLUMN ER EXISTING TO REMAIN LOB LEAVING DRY BULB TEMPERATURE SEER SEASONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO B DIAMETER EUH ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER LEER LEADERSHIP IN ENERGY & ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN ELECTRICAL PHASE HVAC GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE REGUIRFMENTS OF THE FLORIDA BUIUNU COVE F F IH EDITON 2014 - MECHANICAL. NATIONAL ELECTR C CODE. NSA AND ALL LOCAL ORDINANCES. 2. ALL WORK SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECTURAL CVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 3. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT CELNG GRID AND DIFFJSER LOCATIONS. 4. PRIOR "C SUBMITTING A BID, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE STUDIED AND COMPARED THE CONTRACT DOC -MEATS WITH EXISTING/PROPOSED CONDITIONS AND NOT LATER THAN -EN (10) DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID OPENING SHALL REPORT 10 IHE ENGINEER ANY ERROR. INCONSISTENCY, OR OMISSION IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 5. PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONNECTION FROM EACH DUCTWORK CONNECTION TO AN MOVING EQUIPMENT. B. ALL DUCTS SHOWN ARE INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSIONS. 7. LOCATE ALL SENSORS 48` AFF UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. EXACT LOCATION OF ALL THERMOSTATS SHALL BF APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT ANU IHE ENGINEER AND OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. E. CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN ALL COILS AND RE'LACE ALL FILTERS AND BELTS AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. 9. MR COWIIIJNINO EQUIPMENT SHALL BE AS SPECIE ED. ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER WILL REVIEW ANY SUBSTITUTION FOR COMPATIBUTY. 10. DUCT SIZES AND ECUIPMENT OPENINGS THRU ROOTS, SLABS AND WALL PARTITIONS SHALL SUIT EQUIPMENT FURNISHED SEE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS. 11. PROVIDE 'P' TRAP AT AIR HANDLER UNITS PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 12. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL PIPING PASSING THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS AND ROOF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 13. ALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIR WCRK SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OR THE TRADE INVOLVED. 14. THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE FOR THE DUCTWORK IS 2N. 15. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS FOR HVAC LOU PARENT AND DUCTWORK SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE ENGINEERS AP'ROVAL. THE ENGINEER MAY REQUIRE THE CONTRACTOR TO REDO ANY WORK. WHICH WAS NOT APPROVED, OR THE ENGINEER MAY REQUIRE A CRECIT TO THE OWNER. PROVIDE A SET OF AS -RU LIS AFTER THE JOT S COMPLETED. THIS SET SHALL BE CONTINUOUSLY JPDATED DURING CONSTRUCTOR. A. 'ROV DE AIR TURNNG VANES AT ALL 90- DEGREE ELBOWS. 'ROY GE W UME DAMPERS Al SO- BRANCH TAKEOFF AS NDICATEJ IN THE SMACNA 'HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTOR STANDARDS'. 17. PROVIDE FLIER RACKS WHICH ARE ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE AND SEALED MR TIGH- T 8. CONTRACTOR SHALL L NSTALL HVAC ST510M5 AS REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ENGINEER TO INSURE QUIET OPERAIDN. NO UNDUE VIBRATION OR SOUND SHALL BE TRANSMTTED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE AND OCCUPIED AREAS. IF THE EQUIPMENT NSTAJ.ED HAS A HIGHER SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL THAN THE EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED, THEN T WILL BE THE CONTRACTORS AND THE NA4LFAC ORES RESPONSIBILITY TO ELIMINATE ANY ADDmONAL NOISE TRANSMISSION. NOTE: SOME SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS SHOWN MAY NOT PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. ELECTRICAL LOAD SUMMARY PANEL 513 R A 400 Alp 480/277 3 PHASE WITH MI MOW ESTIMATED DEMAND LOAD OF 222 AMPS, THE NLW 'ANEL LOAD WITH THE NEW LINTS IS 252 AMPS. CHANGES N T-E REMANNG SCOPE CE THIS WORK ARE MAR3NAL AND THEY WERE NOT CONSIDERED ON THIS LOW SUMMARY. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO ACT AS THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR THIS PROJECT AND TO INCLUDE ALL OVERSIGHT AS SUCH. ALL SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR'S BID. w«maIM AAA JUL 2 1 2117 .I EA H. KLrxa1 NI, P E. R. 39181 17 A HV /AC REPLACEMENT-PHASE II SPECTRUM FIELD CITY OFCLEARWATER, FLORIDA CGMMACXM WAMAMM OM VI ALAS REV PTV JHG W ft0xa wuelI 17071 GOT JUL' 20, 2017 sF*ISSUED FM M001 M101A 120 Key Plan 1st Level (Lower Level) SCALE: N.T.S. MECHANICAL NOTES: 0 1. DDSENG TRANSFER DUCT NORK TO REMAIN. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: 1. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WRING DEMOLITION AS ALL REPAIR WORK SHALL B 610EUOFD BY THE MECHANICAL CONRACTOR TO RESTORE TO PRECONSTRJCI10N CONDITION. THIS ALSO INCLUDES TWIGS AND WALLS. 2. REMOVE AND REINSTALL CLUING GRID AND CEUNG TALES AS NECESSLAY. OIMNIED MATERNA SHALL BE REPLACED RI-KIND. 3. REMOVE MID REPLACE ICSE KITS MH NEW. 4. ALL EaSTING DUCTWORK TO REMAIN AND BE UNDISTLIM3 D EXCEPT AT CONNECTIONS TO ,MlC UNITS BUD REPLACED. 5. ALL REFRIGERANT PIP810 AND CONDENSATE PIPING TO REMAN, WILTS ISIED. 6. HLIAJAE DEAN MID RENSALL MARC* VALVES MID SIRABERS. 7. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO HEAT PWP /AN BRUER. 8. PROVIDE MISCELLA/AEOLIS ITEMS AS REWIRED TO *RRONDE A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SY51t71. 9. REPLACE WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS AND SPLIT SYSTEMS AS SRONN. 10. THERMOSTATS SWAL BE REPLACED HI-4I0. WILL PAIDHNG MID RANTING SIIAL. BE THE RESPONSIBlulY OF THE IIEOMNCJL CONTRACTOR OF in CONTRACT. 11. CONTRACTOR TO FLUSH CUT ALL EDTDENSER WATER PIPING MEN CCMPLEI. COORORNTE WITH WATER TREATMENT SUBCONTRACTOR TO REIERFY /REPLENISH WATER TREATMENT 10 OWING LEVU. 12. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL FOOPMENT AND CORRESPONDING T•ERMDSTATS FOR RFPLACESSOIT. '3. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE LAKES ON CEILING GOO TO IDENTFY LOCATIONS OF FAN COL UNITS AND AR HANDLERS. HVAC SYMBOL LEGEND: EXISTING EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK TO REMAIN f- — • EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED m EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED (NATO. 4' -0' APE) GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES: 1. COORDINATE EXACT WTLES AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. OWNER. AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL TRACK EXISTING CRCUITS TO TURN OFF BREAKERS PRIOR TO BEONNINC WORK. 3. SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE ALL CEILING WORK (NCLLONG REMOVAL - REPLACEMENT -REUSE OF CLUNG TITLES, UGTHNG -TXTURES AND /OR CEILING MOUNTED DENCES) TEMPORARY UGHTTNG, REQUIREMENTS FROM THE AHJ REQUIRED TO PERFORM ANY ELECTRICAL WORK 4. EVERY CIRCUIT AND CIRCUIT MODIFICATION SHALL BE LEGIBLY IDENTIFIED AS TO ITS CLEAR. EVIDENT. AND SPECIFlC PURPOSE OR USE, NOT L.IATED TO LIGHTS AND RECEPTACLES IF REOJIRED DURING THIS CONTRACT SCOPE OF WORK. 0. WIIERENER THE WORD 'PRONDE' S USED, IT SHALL MEAN 'FURNISH AND INSTALL COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.' B. NEW BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE MINIMUM 2 112 AND ' #12 EG IN 3/4' C UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED FOR HVAC WORK SCOPE. 24'%28' �I- m I6)I16• LOLNER MOUNT ABOVE WINOOW. REFER TO IPCNTECTT RV'L FOR ETEV. \I TEI8M4ME DRWI It AWE GRACIE FSD —21517 r 1 I I •L — NL - LJeNAN k ammo L— r� RM GRAN ,2' 1' IAIE ABOVE GRADE e • •—�1 1CY rT I HP -108 I- -I L - 12X14' -PL LKol t 10 _ 1• e_.;4._-1--; 2' La — II 111 'r °' , 36X12' I LM' 1 'M —'n "' — UI J T1 J 14.9 ra dlr.), - % , 04 #' I ICJ P.- ^tea 1 r1 iP -loos J I 3 Ton • I Fa =1`.0,1 HP- 1 A' 5T J, L , JI ' l 1PJ ..,� WT 40114' Fa 2� M s • 142 1011 6X14. r_ r L 16X12• .7l 1 ETi 11311 ! FSD lj -`1 IFSt 41 I4+l = ICJ rl, t2xt2'E1T _ _ Ll].2x1 FED L_ ZDX12' -- 2di(i2'l �A I. I 1 ' "tom" t NI) 15a — 22x12' r- " r -100(111 1.-.. a • 4� � _ .1.... I'35 TOn ---=-.W. J� —1 J IEy y�F' A 1A•Yu" I tA' • t +I X110' t — 1.100.1.1.10. l� , 13'X'2_ _ 13X12• — -"i. t —4 Q BALANCE I r -- I 0AIWETR 14X12' 20X14' e i F I r--- -- -i --1— 'HP -102A Fa rL -'3 4 Ton Fa Icx�L.__NT� �1 r7T — t'nti �l" ><41 —TrrJ 1.5 Tan - 0 0 I 000800 I' HO - ICJ b� S —S r s 1 38X14' r171 - ICJ - ¢ —a 1 ICJ 1• IT IONTO' w —a I HP -109 4 Ton ra= r r '2X10" ; IAA I rLNm� �31 MAIN LAECec, (I 6X10• -r I L • ° O ISO I 14.41 1 1(' 10X8' r I w - -'' r2, • F- 115L 12 "H x 3 Ten I I L. ria ICJ IFSD 1, AFT Fa ITT Li Li Jr � - IZJ 14X12" ■ 20XL14' • • L_J 11 -1020 �J 4 Ton JrAt W k.fa tit - + M 71 38X31• LOWER 1 BOTTOM AT tt I //V >p / / J DUTCH lFE 4101B OPartial Lower Level Mechanical Replacement Plan SCALE: 1B• = 1' -0" W z w HV /AC REPLACEMENT -PHASE II SPECTRUM FIELD CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA COwucranfOlw...non Mechanical Lower Level I Y I If# 1 'r l� l�. � �i� FSD 1�1k' UP,. F 1 x' �j F Y" .__.__. —. k. J, O, F IL 'I F5D Mal y EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN . r- - — L- -J 30'K12' f41 i x 1 -1148 24'1-6'1 a ,-1 4iv- -- I 12%1,, H .5 'on -- - -�1 A' I r N Key Plan 1st Level (Lower Level) SCALE: N.T.S. MECHANICAL NOTES: 0 1. DOSING TRANSFER DUCT Now To REMAIN. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IC PROVIDE NEW 20 NAP BREAKERS REPLACING DOSING 15 AMP MEAIERS (BASED ON THE ORIGINAL DRAWINGS) NEW BREAKER SHALL MATCH PANEL MANUFACTURER MID AMP NIERRJPHON CAPACITY (AC). CONTRACTOR SHALL WRFY BRANCH 3RCUIT WRING IS .12 AND (Plus I AWE SZE FOR EVERY 75 FEET OF JSTANCE) FROM PANEL TO LOA) CONNECTTW POINT. VERIFY EK5'NG IMSCONIECT IS RATIO FOR AT LEAST 70 NITS MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: L DARE SHOULD BE TNEN DURING OEMOURON AS Al REPAR WORT SHALL BE INCLUXD BY TIE MECHANICAL CENTWCIU1 TO RESTORE TO PRECONSTRUCHON CONORDN. THIS INCLUDES ALSO CEXING3 AND NL15. 2. REMOVE AND REINSTALL =BIG GRID Alp CEILING 18E5 AS NECESSARY. DAMAGED IIIERVL SHALL BE REPLACED 01 -KIND. 1 REMOVE AND REPLAOU HOSE TOTS NTH NEW. 4. ALL COSTING WORKER TO REMMI Np EE JNDS RBED EXCEF' AT CONNECTIONS TO INAC LPTITS BUS REPLACED. 5. Al]. REFRIGERANT PIING AND CONDENSATE PIPING TO REMAIN MESS NOTED. 6. REMOVE, CLEAN ND REINSTALL. MAIM VALUES AND SIMMERS. 7. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT OECIRCAL S ONIER TO HEAT PUMP/M( HANDLER 8. PROVO( MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS AS REINED TO PROADE A CONKER OPERATIONAL SYSTEM. 9. REPLACE WATER SOURCE FEAT PUMPS ND SPLIT SYSTEMS AS SHOWN 10. THERMOSTATS SHILL B REPLACED Al-KPD. VAL PAICHNG Alp PAINING SHALL BE RE RESPUNSRIFY Of FE MEOMNCAL CONTRACTOR OF WS CONTRACT. 11. CONTRACTOR TO FLUSH OUT ALL CONDEf6ER WATER PIPING WFEN COLPLETE COOTDRATE WM, NAUER TREATMENT SUBCONTRACTOR TD REVERFY /REPLENSH NITER TREATMENT TO DasING LEVELS. 12 CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EOLXPMID4r AND CORRESPONDING THERMOSTATS MR RANT. 13. CONTRACTOR TO PRONIOE LABELS ON CEILING GRID TO IDENTIFY LOCATIONS OF FAN COL UNIS AND AIR HANDLERS. GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES: 1. COORDINATE EXACT OUTLETS AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. OWNER, AM) GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROACH -N. 2. ELECTRICA;, CONTRACTOR SHALL TRACK DOSING CIRCUITS TO TURN OFF BREAKERS PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK 3. SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE ALL CEILING WORK (INCLUDING REMOVAL- REPLANT -REUSE OF CEILING TITLES, UGTMNG FIXTURES AND/OR CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES) TEMPORARY LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS FROM TFE AHJ REQUITED TO PERFORM ANY ELECTRICAL WORK. 4. EVERY CIRCUIT AND ORC:.IT MOO14ICATIO14 SHALL BE LEGIBLY IOEN-FIED AS TO ITS CLEAR, EVIDENT, AND SPECIFIC PURPOSE OR USE, NOT LIMITED TO UGHTS AND RECEPTACLES IF REQUIRED DURING THIS CONTRACT SCOPE OF WORK. 5. NAEREVER THE WORD 'PROVIDE' IS USED, IT SHALL MEAN FURNISH AND INSTALL COMPLETE OPERATIONAL sYSTEM.- 6. NEW BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE MNMUM 2 112 AND 1112 E.G N 3/4' C UNLESS O'HERWSE NOTED FOR HVAC WORK SCOPE. 1- oc 18'%1Y rr� F\'A ID 2 14711 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ i HVAC SYMBOL LEGEND: EXISTING EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK TU REMAIN 1— _1. 1._.. - -W4 EXISTING FQUPMENT TO RE REMOVED AND REPLACED a) EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN la EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO RE REMOVED AM) REPLACED (MID. 4'-O' AFT) B Partial Lower Level Mechanical Replacement Plan O SCALE. 1/8'.. JUL 2 I 2117 Joseph H. GM, lit, P.E. FL. 5181 HV /AC REPLACEMENT -PHASE II SPECTRUM FIELD LL 0 Zu Z 132V o w 0 O =U a aon.row- CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA MS V JHG GSPROECT 411., 17071 DAV JULY 20, 2017 SWAIM Mechanical Lower Level M 101 B] �% Key Plan 1st Level (Lower Level) SCALE N.T.S. MECHANICAL NOTES: I. LASING TRANSFER DUCT WORK TO REMVN. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: I. ONE SHOULD 9E TA1001 OIIMND OEMOLTEN AS AL REPAIR WORE SHALL BE DEWED BA THE MECIWBEM CONTRACTOR -0 RESTORE 70 PRECONS'RUOTIN COILlDdl MIS NCLWES ALSO CEIINGS MC WWS. 2. DA AGE I1 ,EATDLVL SW U. REPLACED N- -Kilo. TIES A$ NECESSARY. 3. WOE MID REPLACE HOSE INS MTH NEW. 4. ALL DOME DUCTWORK N U BENT. REPLACED. IXCEPf 5. ALL REFRIGERANT PANG AND COICEIISA1E PIPNG TO 9(1491, UNLESS NOTED. !, REMOVE, CLEAN MID RDNSTEL MINCING YMSTS AND SIMMERS. 7. OISCINNECT MC RECONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO TEAT PL.MP /AR HANGER 8, RINICEMISCELLANEOUS ITEMS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE OPERATION. 9. REPLACE WATER SOURCE HEAT RAPS MC SPLIT SYSTEMS AS SHOWN. 10. BOLL BE TIE REPLACED Of NE HI MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR OF THIS COMPACT. 11. ME ER TO PARE♦ ET �DM19 PN MELON. E IRAN PAN TO 12. COMRACTOR COORDINATE WRH MAIER TTMMENT��SIUCCHI SUBCONTRACTOR 10 REVFJNY/REPEENSH WATER TREATMENT TO EXITNG LEVELS. 12. CONTRACTOR � 0 VERIFY ML EOUPIEM AND OIONG THERMOSTATS FOR 13. OF FAA 0 PROVIDE ARILS 514 CELE (RD TO IDENTIFY WGTONS GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES: 1. COORDINATE EXACT OUTLETS AND EIXAPV4ENT LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. OWNER, AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL -RACK EXISTING CIRCUITS TO TURN OFF BREAKERS PRIOR TO BEGINNNC WORK. 3. SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE ALL CEILING WORK (INCLUONG REMOVAL - REPLACEMENT -REUSE OF CEILNG TITLES. UGTHING FIXTURES AND /OR CEILNG MOUNTED DEVICES) TEMPORARY LIGHTING. REQUIREMENTS FROM THE AHJ REQUIRED TO PERFORM ANY ELECTRICAL WORK. 4. EVERY CIRCUIT AND CRCUT MODIFICATION SHALL BE LEGIBLY IDENTIFIED NOT AS TO CLEAR. UM TEDI TO UG1ITS E MID RECEPTACLES IF REQUIRED DINING USE. CONTRACT SCOPE OF WORK. 5. WHEREVER 114E WORD 'PROVIDE.' XI USED, IT SHALL MEAN 'FURNISH AND INSTALL COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.' 6. NEW BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE NMMMUM 2 02 AND 1112 E.G N 3/4' C UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED FOR HVAC WORK SCOPE. MATURATE (ON THIS PACE) 1 22('.2' 12'X10' ` r � I � L - -I - -i- _ I = in 19'10 21 J T 1 L 5'XIY L LL •A' 14514' 28X14' -- 7'Ill. T-1 E14.111 A -)IE' I A11U -103 5 Ton C Iky JUL 212017 Jaaa9n It Gang III, PE. FL 39491 s Q 7 n'� Z Z C n t� l5 J WIHfl HVAC SYMBOL LEGEND: EXISTING EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK TO REMAIN EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED m EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO BE REMAIN SIN COSTING THERMOSTAT TO BE REMOVED AM/ REPLACED (IND. 4•-O AFF) D1 Partial Lower Level Mechanical Replacement Plan SCALE: l/8" = 1' -0" C Novelty Storage Mechanical Replacement Plan SCALE: 1/8" = 1' -0" AH -104 Condensate Through Wall TERMINATE CHAN 12' CU -102 10 Ton CU -101 10 Ton UNLINK (ON 'HE PAGE) Condensate on Exterior Wall UP Existing Dry Well U SPECTRUM FIELD i aa.. CUP' OF CIEARWATER, 9 FLORIDA xswaoarroiw.rc,. xe d GE 1701ECT 17071 JULY 20,2017 OW ME Mechanical Lower Level OAlt F I D2 Partial Lower Level Mechanical Replacement Plan SCALE: 1/8' =1' -0' M 101 C Key Plan 2nd Level (Concourse) SCALE: N.T.S. \ 1 , / /0 F1 I I LJ DESERT ARE 2.5 TED FAY -1C1 TROOM S S r L J CT-1 J JO j vs Jo IT 0 CU X 30 0 MATCH UNE B (l1S SHED() MECHANICAL NOTES: 0 1. DOSING TRINSFER DUCT WORK TO REMAIN, 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO MONDE NEWT 20 Aim BREAKERS REPLACING COSMC 15 AMP BREAKERS (BASED ON THE ORIGINAL CRAMKK) NEW BREAIIER SHALL WATCH PAEL MAMEAC I R AND AMP INTERRUPTION CAPACITY (AC). =TRACTOR SHALL VERY BRANCH CRCUIT MINE S /12 ONG (PLUS 1 MG SIZE FOR EVERY 75 FEET OF DISTANCE) FROM PANEL TO LOAD CONNECTOR PORT. VERIFY 00SNC OISCEN w S RATED FOR AT LEAST 20 AMPS. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: 1. CAE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHIG DEIJOLIWN AS AL. REPAIR WORK MALL BE NCLIAED BY THE MECAKAL CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE TO P ECONSTRUCTION CONDDON. THIS 6,0L0ES ALSO COUNTS ND WALLS. 2. REMOVE /ND REINSTALL CEILING Clip AND CUM TILES AS IECESSNO'. DAMAGED MATERIAL SHALL BE REPLACED N -Kilo. 3. ROAM AND REPLACE HOSE KITS WITH NOM. 4. ALL EDS'IG DUCTWORK TO ROM AND BE UNDISTURBED EXCEPT AT CONTECTENS TO HVAC WES BEING REPLACED. 6. ALL RESTAGERANT PIPING NO CONDENSATE PIPING TO RERUN UNLESS NDILD. 6. REMOVE CLEAN AID RONSTAL BALANCING VALVES AND SRANER . 7. IASINIECT MD RECONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO HEAT PUMP /AR HANDER. 8. PROVIDE U6CELANEOUS TENS AS REpNREO TO PROIDE A COMPLETE OPEMTIONA. SYSTEM. 9. REPLACE WATER SOURCE HEAT PLUMPS MID SPLIT SYSTEMS AS SHOWN. 10. THERMOSTATS SHALL BE REPLACED IN-KIND. THERMOSTATS IN DPIMOND OUTFITTERS TO BE RELOCATED FOR SETTER TEMPERATURE CONTROL WALL. PATCHING AND PANTING SHALL BE THE RESPONSBL(ry OF WE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR OF THE CONTRACT. 11. COINIMCTOR TO FLUSH OUT ALL CONDENSER WATER PIPIT WHEN COMPLETE. COOIOFWIE WITH WATER TREATMENT SUBOONTRACTOR TO REVEAIFY /REPIF.WSH WATER TREATMENT TO EXISTING LFYFIS. 12. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY AJ. EOAPMENT AND CORRESPO RIG THERMOSTATS FOR RE)TACEMENT. 13. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE LABELS ON CEAING MD TO DENNY LOCATORS IF FAT CON. UNTO AND AR 'MILERS. GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES: 1. COORDINATE EXACT OUTLEi5 AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. OWNER. AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL TRACK EXISTING CRCUITS TO TURN OFF BREAKERS PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 3. SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE AU. CEI NG WORK (INCLUDING REMOVAL-REPLACEMENT-REUSE OF CEIUNG TITLES. JOTTING FIXTURES AND/OR CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES) TEMPORARY LIGIITNG, REQUIREMENTS FROM THE ANJ REQUIRED TO PERFORM ANY ELECTRICAL WORK. 4. EVERY CIRCUIT AND CIRCUIT MODIFICATION SHALL BE LEGIBLY IDENTIFIED AS TO ITS CLEAR, EVIDENT. AND SPECIFIC PURPOSE OR USE. NOT UMIIED TO UGH TS AND RECEPTACLES IF REQU'RED DURING 'MS CONTRACT SCOPE OF WORK. 5. WHEREVER THE WORD 'PROVIDE' IS USED, IT SHALL MEAN 'FURNISH MALE INSTALL COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.' 6. NEW BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL. BE MINIMUM 2 /12 AND 1/12 EG IN 3/4' C UNLESS OTHERVASE NOTED FOR HVAC WORK SCOPE. HVAC SYMBOL LEGEND: 1. L EXISTING EOUIPAIIXT /DUCTWORK TO RETAIN EXIS11N0 EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED () EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN a DUSTING THERMOSTAT TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED (MTD. 4' -0' AFT) JUL 2 1 2017 JonRB H. Om IL P.E FL D44914 1r L,t rlCU -103 5 Rm. 18-X16' 80TTOM Woo LOUVER AT 10'8• A.F.F. --kr MATCH UNE A (TEES SHEET) 10x10' (11_161101_ blia t e1116' 4 To 1,5 I ROOF I ': Ii rk%F L 117(8' _G.al L A 1 14 1.1 I I I 1,—.1 L1Dx1� 81(6' 2 ( ryT —f {HF -203 i I ( SE Ton - -�t 1' . I 1-1 0-I 1P -206 20'7(1 3 Ton I - F Cal IF-206 3 Ton i I \\ n" 01(' 7" I 7' 1f ' X8 M A-6-0 J_rt d y '4 I IH - f__ T4 2T — — — 1- -1-1-"' T, '.._ 4 Ton O•XDJ _J NAT II/ IJ X71 I" l IEli -- kJ 1• 6' L_r 19111 _ P17'7(1�Lj . •� S to JS T.171 I. F kTi 1 UPA I3E'ON r 77 ILJ e4-0 --- -E'er 6 X6' 201 SPML- DUCTWORK AT B'6' A.F.F. _ y \IAMOND t u in TIERS-7 111tr ABOVE DOOR 181( ^6' LOWER MO OF LOUVER AT 10'8' ATS. W z 0 ID 0 0 0 SPECTRUM FIELD A E CITY OF CLEARWATER,S FLORIDA aR. rta.A DRAWN S. JIGrt 3,RIRARCI ,eR 17071 JULY 20. 2017 Mechanical Concourse OA Partial Concourse Mechanical Replacement Plan SCALE: 1/13' = 1'-0" O C Partial Concourse Mechanical Replacement Plan SCALE: 1/8" =1' -0' B Partial Concourse Mechanical Replacement Plan SCALE: 1/8' - 1' -0' M 102 / II CN PROPOSED LOCATION FOR NEW MAC UNIT B1 Diamond Club Mechanical Existing Plan SCALE: 1/8' - 1' -0" BL On Diamond Club Mechanical Renovation Plan SCALE: 1/8' = 1'-0' M103 A4NT0 JUL 2 1 2017 i H. G NW II, P.E FL 39491 0 0 XI D I 0 HV /AC REPLACEMEN, -PHASE II SPECTRUM FIELD CUM arOOMISM CITY OF CLEARWATE , FLORIDA cmmaox.ro.wm. MS MIN. ay JHG 17071 DATE JULY 20.2017 alr.O Mechanical Third Floor OATE NT MID FOC MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. F]RSING TRANSFER DUCT WORM TO REMAIN. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVDE NEW 20 AMP BREAKERS REPLACING EXISTING 15 AMP BREAKERS (BASED ON THE MM.. DRAWNS) HEAT BREAKERS SHIN.. MATCH PANEL MANUFACTURER AND AMP NTERRUPRON 01PACRY (AC). CONTRACTOR SHALL VEM7 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING IS 112 AWG (PUTS I AM SIZE FOR EVERY 75 FEET OF 015 -ANTE) FROM PANS. TO LOA) CWINECTON PONE VERIFY EX611NG DISCONNECT 5 RATED FOR AT LEAST 20 AMPS. 3. NEW CONDENSING AND NR HNIDLERS UNITS 1301 AND 1302. ETECIRMAL CONTRACTOR TO MONDE NEW NENA 3R MINI POWER CENTER MANUFACTURED BY EATON P48G2BT2TP OR EQUAL RUN NEW 4 l& 1 110 E.G. IN 1' CONOIAT FROM PANEL 913 (LOCATED AT DAMO1D DUGOUT ROOM / 01.33.04). PROVIDE NEW 30 MP 3 NIERRUP11014 CANON (AO. POLE BRENER AT AN AVMABLE SPACE MATCH PANEL MANUFACluR MID RUSE PANEL CRCU TOTED DIRECTORY AS NEEDED JSNG ED lm. IN A ERPERM1ANFNT MEDIA. LOCATE REIgD CRCUIT DIRECTORY INSIDE PANS. DOOR PRMIDE 33 MP 2 POLE BREAKERS N IRA MII POWER CENTER RIND NEW 3 110, 1 110 E.G. N 1' CONDUIT. TO AMA' NON FUSED 2 POLE MANUAL LOCKABLE MIMS OF DIDECH ECIS SHALL BE INSTALS) AT EACH LNII N AA ACCFS513E LOCATION Key Plan 3rd Level SCALE: N.T.S. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: 7HE MECHANICAL I. O R� DURING DEMOL1101 AS NI. �WK BY CONTRACTOR T RESTORE 00110ITai Na015 MS0 AM 2. REMOVE AND RENSTAU. CEXNG GMO MID CFHNG IL.ES AS NECESSARY. DAMAGED RATEf6AL 51140 NE REPLACED N -END. 3. REMOTE AND REPLACE HOSE KCS WITH NEW. 4. AL_ EXSTNG DUCTWORK TO ROM AND BE UNDISTURBED EXCEPT COMECTUNS TO 14AIC LINOS BEING REPLACED. 5 ALL REFRIGERANT RPING AND CONDENSATE PPNG TO REMMA UN.fSS NOTED. & REMOVE, CL=MM MID RENSTML BALANCING VALVES MAO STRAINERS. 7. DSCONNECT AN) RECONNECT FLECIR'CAL ssma TO HEAT PUMP /NR HANDLER. R. PROVDE IMSCEJANE00S ITEMS AS REQUIRED "0 PROVIDE A COMPLETE °POTATION./ SYSTEM. 9. REPLACE INTER SCARCE HEAT PUMPS MID SPLIT SYSTEMS AS SHOWN. 10. HEMOSTATS SHALL REPLACED PATCHW HID PANTING MALL BE THE RESPONSBM OF CONTRACTOR TIE 1/E04410CAL � C RAJ. I1. HP -301 MID HP -304 ARE LOCATED ABOVE '+NEC COL.NGS. CARE MUST BE TARN DURING RFIKNAL AND IRTTA LATRJN O OF OF REPLACEMENT. CAEILIANITO BE AREC. PATCHED AND CEILING TILES 10 MATCH AM THE 12. NEW DWI- -SPURS TO BE ADDED TO DIAMOND CLUB. NONE CJRREN'LY 9ITALLED. 13. CONTRACTOR SUBCONTRACTOR ro T /EDP WASTER TREATMENT COMPLETE. LOADS. 2 12. CONTRACTOR TO WRIT Al EQUPME/1T AND COMKOUDIG THERMOSTATS FOR REPLACEMENT. 13. CONTRACTOR TO 'P0910E LABELS ON CUING GRID TO CERTIFY LOCATIONS OF FAN COIL UNITS AND AM HANDLERS. GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES: 1. COORDINATE EXACT OUTLETS AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT, OWMER, AND GENERA._ CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL TRACK EX STING CIRCUITS TO TURN OFF BREAKERS PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 3. SCOPE TLE, 0114611INCLUDE IIXTURES CEILING OF CEILING TIAND /CR CEWNG 140)1111150 DEICES) TEMPORARY UGHTNG, REQLNRE►E]N'S FROM THE AHJ REQUIRED TO PERFORM ANY ELECTRICAL. WORK. 4. EVERY CIRCUIT AND CIRCUIT MCOFICATONI SHALL BE LEGBLY IDENTIFIED AS TO ITS CLEAR. EVIDENT, AND THIS CONTACT SCOPE OF WORK. TO U(.lITS ANA RECEPTACLES E 5. WHEREVER THE WORD 'PROYDE' IS USED, IT SHAM MEAN "FURNISH AID INSTALL COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.' 6. NEW BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE MIBIUM 2 112 AMID 1 112 E.G N 3/4' C UNLESS OTHERYIISE NOTED FOR HVAC WORK SCort. 12.1141,4:_ 1. I , 12'512_ -_12 I _. --(.] — -- 1 167(16• ' 1• I IP-i DUCT up TO L 6796' OA IRTMCS -Cr- L1 ID7B' `4y8• R� S� J 97114' / R3 / ra /,r \ I / MAN l 11� I 2h'aN / / X��`I` ; J Ely Nfel r-7'- J Y tr 1 AT' Fin 13700' �J / 7 1 OThird Floor Mechanical Replacement Plan SCALE: 118" = 1' -0' HVAC SYMBOL LEGEND: COSTING EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK TO REMAIN } 1X151140 EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED COSTING THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN EXISTING THERMOSTAT TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED (MID. 4' -0• AFT) CUENINFOWAION CITY OFCLEARWATER, FLORIDA NEW UNITS TO REPLACE EXISTING WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS - 1ST FLOOR NARN HP -1004 HP -1000 H' -101 HP -106 HP-107 HP -108 HP -110 HP -112 HP -113 HP -114A HP -116 HORIZONTAL DUCTED PORIZONIAL MIMED HORIZONTAL DUCTED HORIZONTAL HORIZON:AL OUCT71 DUCTED HORIZONTAL DUCTED HORIZONTAL DUCTED 6CRQONIAL DUCTED HORZONTTAI DUCTEC 11/R17067AL HORI7011'M ' DUCTED DUCTED HORIZONTAL DUCTED HORIZONTAL UUCI4J SUPPLY CF41 1140 1330 1140 1330 1520 915 763 1330 315 500 0 1900 750 1140 iW 013196E AIR CENT 9l 1420 HP C 830 173 -20 310 36C 303 STATIC PRESSURE (EM./TOT.) 3.660 0549 0.660 0549 0.847 0.889 0.545 1/3 0.549 1/2 0.652 1/3 0526 1.0 0.655 1/7 MOTOR 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1.3 1/2 COOUNG 3250 58.28 5818 SENSIBLE CAPACITY 4489 21.48 35.11 26.28 41.4 41.4 ENTERING AR !LW. 'F 06/1413 TOTAL C4P91IR 494 32.43 47.86 32.73 39.16 48.87 31.96 23,15 39.33 17.22 58.9 32.43 30NSI16E CAPACITY 1,101 25.15 33.56 24.92 307 35.73 21.46 1588 31.36 12.87 414/ 2577 ENTERING AIR TEVP. 'F 68/W6 •F 08(116 75.0/62.6 54.85/52.69 78.8/85.5 57.55/55.39 75.9/63.6 75.5/62.6 54.42/52.30 762/64.0 55.04/53.22 77.4/651 55 .99/53.46 777x/65.3 58.32/55.24 76.4/630 54.87 /5214 75.0/52.6 57.10/54.69 77.4/002 75.5/62.6 54.86/52.69 _ £656 G MR 1E188. 55.94/53.81 57.66/54.92 ]TILLED WATER FLOW GPM '0.0 11.8 10.0 11.8 12.79 10.0 6.7 11.8 50 15.83 17,0 '96943 TAGS E9'. / 100. 008/096 066/100 087/793 051/089 192 056/086 11.25 059/087 049/085 046 /083 047/082 C52/094 048/080 WATER PRESS. DROP FT. 920 7.3 19.2 7.3 1.3 14.7 19.2 9.2 19.0 7,3 HEATNC 13.4 13.4 OP - -- 4.8 4.8 4.6 48 4.5 4.5 VCA AW5 TOTAL CAPAC TT 689 47.5 53.0 475 703.0 61.19 45.98 30.8 53,0 22.74 74.6 47.50__ •41ERNG 818 7858. '= 08 68.0 68.0 68.0 68.0 68.0 68.0 Ni.0 68.0 BBL 88.0 68.0 ._.. . PRE -FLIER EFFEIENOY DEPTH / X MEIN 8 44.15 8 8513 8 MERV 9 MERV 8 MERV 9 MERV 8 MERV 8 MERV 8 MERV 8 MERV 8 UNIT 44E0,341 LBS 343 316 343 318 426 343 285 318 268.0 428 343 EER -- 14.5 13.6 14,5 13.6 13.9 14.5 14.4 13,6 13.3 13.4 14.5 COP -- 4.8 4.6 4.8 4.6 4.8 4.8 4.7 4.6 4.8 4.5 4.8 NCA AMPS 8.7 9.2 8.7 9.7 '0.59 8.7 545 92 1'.16 12.45 8.7 1,10C 4865 15.0 15.0 15.0 150 150 15.0 15.0 160 15.0 200 15.0 ELECTRICAL V / PH / 142 _ 460/3/60 460/3/60 460/3/60 460/3/60 463/3/60 460/3/60 460/3/60 46C/3/60 265/1/60 480/3/63 460/3/60 MANLFACRMER - -- TRINE TRAK 16.4496 TRANS TWIT TRANF TRAW MANE FRAME TRANF TRANE MODEL NO - -- 414F035418011090001 0E6E042441021013L00 1 010035,41101138L001 00-00424118321080001 6E6E04841901108_301 06HE03541802106R001 0E45024411021351001 CEHE042H021CRL031 GEHE0187 1101101H30' CEHE760411402108LOC1 609E035418011040001 N014NAL TONNAGE 3 3.5 .� 3,S 4 3 2 3.5 1.5 5 3 NOTES - -- AI. ALL ALL AU. ALL ALL ALL 411 ALL Al AU. tIQIU I. PROVIDE WITH SINGLE POINT POWER ■ANNECTON. 2. CIW90N 16 (ELEOTR CAL) TO PROVIDE STARTER/OISCCNNECT. 3. PROVIDE (2) TWO SETS OF FILTERS. NEW UNITS TO REPLACE EXISTING WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS - 2ND FLOOR VAR< MF -20 " HP -202 HP -204 HP -70.'5 HP -707A HP -2058 CONFIGURATION HORIZONTAL DUCTED HORIZONTAL DUCTED PORIZONIAL MIMED HORIZONTAL DUCTED 10R ZONTAL DUCTED HORIZONTAL DUCTED SUPPLY CPU 915 1520 1330 1140 1900 1500 007916E MR UM 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATIC PRESSURE :ESE) M. IRO 0.806 0.847 1.0 0.549 0.685 0.526 0.526 MOTOR HP 1/3 1/2 1/2 1.0 1.0 COOUR„ TOTAL 08684317 MRS 31.82 48.0 40.60 29,5' 3250 58.28 5818 SENSIBLE CAPACITY 4489 21.48 35.11 26.28 41.4 41.4 ENTERING AR !LW. 'F 06/1413 77.1/64.9 76.7/64.4 77.4/65.1 76.4/63.0 76.9/64.5 7613/645 LEAVING NR TIM". 'F 018/•8 55.66/53.14 55.61/53.71 37.14/54.37 55.35 /53.15 50.9/54.18 56.9 /54.18 CHLIED WATER ROW GPM 10.0 10.71 ' 1.8 101 15.8 16,8 PIPING TAGS NI. / 180. 611/021 912/322 013/323 015/025 017/027 0'8/028 WATER PRESS. DROP R. 120 7.3 8.23 '9.2 7.3 190 190 HEATING TOTAL CAPACITY 485 46.98 60,19 53.0 47.5 74.E 74.6 ENTERING NZ TEW. 'F 08 68.0 68.0 68.0 68.0 69,0 680 'RE- FINER EFFICIENCY DEPTH / X MERV 8 MERV 8 8550 8 MERV 8 MERV 8 MERV 8 JN1 8100401 LBS 343 428 318 343 428 428 MI - -- 14,5 13.9 13.6 14.5 13.4 13.4 OP - -- 4.8 4.8 4.6 48 4.5 4.5 VCA AW5 8.7 10.58 92 8.7 12.45 12.45 HOOF AMPS 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 24.0 20.0 1ECTRCA_ Y / PH / H7 - -- 460/3/60 MANE 460 /3/50 TRAN5 480/3/80 1RANE 460/3/50 IWWE 460/3/60 TRANS 460/3/R TRA14E VANLIFACTURER 00641 NO. - -. 06-E0364141021066051 GEHE048414011011001 5EDE0424114021088001 G]iE03541HO' 1061001 GE E06041H0210RL001 GFI9C6041140710R1001 40141/4.41 TONNAGE 3 4 3.5 3 5 NOTES -- ALL ALL ALL ALL All Al NOM 1. PROWDF WITH SINRF POINT POWER CCNWCTCN. 2 DIVISION 16 (ELECTRICAL) TO PROVIDE STAR-ER/DISCONNECT. 3. PROVIDE (2) TWO SETS OF FLIERS. LSEAL HV /AC REPLACEMENT -PHASE II SPECTRUM FIELD MS _HG .1 B . 17371 nAtt JULY 20. 2017 Mechanical Schedules M201 E NEW UNITS TO REPLACE EXISTING WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS - 3RD FLOOR HP -303 HP -3 HP-301 HP-V..2 -V..2 d 193RIZO4GL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL E- AL DUCT11 DICED DICIED DUCTED T 900 760 1900 , 1140 1140 0 0 0 0..686 0.665 0.529 0.526 0.545 y 13 S.PPLY OLISI3E AIR STATIC PRESSURE EEXT./TOr MOTOR CCOLDIG TOTAL CAPACITY SEN561E CAPAarf MONO MR TEMP. LEAVIMG AR TEMP. MID WATER 9014 PPB.0 TAGS WATER PRESS DR6' HEATING TOTAL CAPACITY ENTERING MR TOP. PRE -FR-ER ETFCENC'Y UNIT RDCIIT 311 58 EER COP LICA 12.46 Lp6 Ai1PS 20A .LSD ._ MDCP ELECIRX;FL V / / 1.2 460/3/86 460/3/60 -- TM ZtME MANUFACTURER MODEL N0. GE1F06041N021pRL001 OENE03540H0110lR001 5 3 NOMINAL TONNAGE 2-4 3307 33.42 58.26 _..__ 4138 2403 24.46 41.19 n5/853 75.7/645 77. /857 76.7/94.3 n.t - � 76.3 64.1 ._. 58.2 ..13 1 67.49 •.39 S656.9 .18 6830 66.45 56.4 .76 d•73 '� 188 168 8.7 16.8 10.0 10.0 036 /OW 031/041 032/d1 033/043 034 044 0319.0 19.0 19.0 14.7 190 7.3 7.3 74.6 74.6 33.4 668}1 74.6 478 473 66.0 RID _ 66.0 •F DB 68.0 680 68A MEIN 0 I RI g NERD B DEP1N 0 MEIN 8 ' 0 M RV 8 428 478 265 n 985 420 343 343 14.5 13.4 13.4 4.4 4.5 4.7 130 14.5 4.8 4.6 8.7 N.L. 48 8.7 150 460/3/60 1RNE OBE03541N011O1RO01 3 2-4 NOTES t. NO ACCESS TO E3UP MEN_ PIN/ SCHEDULE 04041TET BOUVALD4CY TO A 5 TINT WSW. WRY PRIOR TO OMEI11111 2 PROVIDE WITH SNOLE POINT POWER CONNECTION. 3. DIVIS06 16 (ELECTRICAL) TO PROVIDE STARTCR/DISCCNNCCT. . PROVIDE (21 TWO SES OF HL'tFb. DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM DX AHU SCHEDULE NR HANDLER NO. LCCARON MAN:PACTURER MR HAMMER 400E1 NO. FEFR'GEPAIE NO RN. CAPACITY TOTAL GPACIW ENTERING AR TEMPERATURE T0115 LBH EIECRC WDGNT 89F/08F AN -301. 302 DIAMOND CUB W0S185N PKA136NA6 R -410A 7/0/1.2 3.0 340 NOTES 800 /67.3 209- 230/1/60 46 1 -8 1. 'ROADS WITH PRO.SMLIMABLE T -STAT. __ 2 TURNS- WIN THERIU1 EXPANSION VALVE. 3. REFIKERANT PIPE VIED IN ACCORDANCE MATH MANUFACTLRER'S RECOMMEILATIONS FOR 017E LENGTHS. 4. PROADE WTN SINGLE POOR POWER CONNECTION. 5. 7804100 INTEGRAL CONDENSATE PUMP. 5. 163001 UNIT POWERED FROM OUTDOOR UM'. DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM DX CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE 30NDENSN3 UNIT NO. 96544 FACTURER 660001 N0. ARBOR TEMPERATURE COMPRESSORS STEPS OF CAPACITY OROUOS F. FC1WC MCA/MOW No. 01 -301. 302 VRSU8081 PUYA36NHA6 Y /4 /N2 AMPS SEER WEIGHT FLORIDA OINOFNSING 041 O.NT 1 TO 8F LOCATED ON ROOF AND TO BE MD ACCORDING TO FLORIDA BLUING CODE CBS. 206 -230 /1/60 25/30 14 163 48 12.46 2.45 5.46 20.0 20.0 15.0 460/3/60 NINE TRANF 0060 GEHE060414311011W01 GENE02441H0110LRC0 5 5 2 460/3/60 460/3/60 TRANF 2-4 2 -4 2 -4 NEW UNITS TO REPLACE EXISTING SPLIT SYSTEM AIR HANDLER UNIT SCHEDULE u-td AID HANDLER NO. ARRANGEMENT 545FLO OUTSIDE MR AREA SERVED EXT. STATIC PRESSURE TOTAL CAPACITY SENSIBLE CAPACITY ENT. AIR TEMP. I VG AIR TEMP. HEAT CAPACITY FAN MOTOR ELECTRIC MCA MOCP AIR FILTER EFFICIENCY MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. NOMINAL TONNAGE WEIGHT NOTES HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL WAREHOUSE 78/65 56.2/55.` 7.2/9.6 208 - 230/1/60 V/Pli/HZ AMPS MERV 8 GAW580C48MISA NOTES: 1. PROVIDE SINGLE POINT '0WER CONNECTOR. 2. PROVIDE FAC -CRY WASHABLE PICOT. 3. DISCONNECT PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 5 PROVIDE COMPLETE 1ST YEAR PARTS AND LABOR WARRANT. NEW UNITS TO REPLACE SPLIT SYSTEM CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE CL1-103 N01.41 AL TONNAGE COMPRESSOR TYPE AMEILNI ItAIP. 4 •' 46 E'er OMNI MUM CU -101 10 CIRCUITS EIE TRIO CU -102 10 480/3/60 MCA 640CP EFFICIENCY - COOLING REFRIGERANT OOEL 0. NOTES AMPS AMPS SEER TYPE (2) 8.6 5.0 SCROLL CU -104 4.0 SCR01 95 460/3/60 (2) 8.6 2.5 21.9 25.0 MINNI 11.2 EER R -410A 2.5 21.9 424 1RANE TTA12014400A ALL 25.0 95 460/3/60 11.2 EER R -410A 424 9.6 1.0 208- 230/1/60 13.0 20.0 13.0 TRANE TTA12011400A Al NOTES. 1. FURNISH WITH LOW AMBIENT OPTION_ 2. PROVIDE CORROSLDN RESSTAN- CCNCENSER COI_ COATING. 3. DISCONNECT FRONDED 3Y ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 4. PROVIDE COMPLETE 1ST YEAR PARTS AND LABOR WARRANTY. 5. MONDE 10140 LIVE SET RE785..WA4T 01I1110 FCR LENGTHS OVER 50 FT. YERIFY MTh LIANJFACTURER R -4100 250 18.5 0.95 24.0 40.0 14.5 TRANE 2TTAC050A4000AA ALL R -410A 212 TRANE 4TTR404811 ALL ••'HENRY No.3949t :° Ti \Y:. JUL 2 1 tD17 ph IS Grimm N PE. FL. 39491 III 19 HV /AC REPLACEMENT -PHASE II SPECTRUM FIELD CTY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA CC+.ACwa..7.w.e0■ lamfMND .IHG 17071 JULY 20, 2017 Mechanical Schedules i i'i "X1ijriyx GALVANIZED STEEL )" THICK ALUMINUM THREAD PLATE COVER WITH ALUMINUM SLIDE- HANDLE EXTERIOR WALL 1ST FLOOR 1" VENT 4" M1N. ABOVE GRAM_ BLACT'CP SEAL AROUND PIPE CONDENSATE DRAIN PITCH TO DRYWFLL SAND 1< ALL AROUND 4" PVC PPE CRUSHED AVEL FILL OOR DRYWELL DETAIL NOT TO SCALE THREADED PLUG CLEAN-OUT --1� I ill F00 HR I 1 imm S_OPE TOWA RDS DRAIN AT A MIN. O F 1/9' -INCH PER LINEAR AIR HAMMING EMINENT DRAIN PAN ` THREADED MALE NPT 1 CONNECTION UNION -TRAP NOTES: 1. CONDENSATE PIPE SIZE SHALL BE FULL SIZE OF UNIT DRAIN CONNECTION, IAN. SIZE Of 3/4 -INCH. 2. STEM "EIGHT 'A' SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 1 -INCH GREATER THAN FAN SUCTION PRESSURE. MIN MUM HEIGHT 5- ALL BE 3- INCHES. NOTE: THIS DETAIL WAS DESIGNED TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF PIE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE SECTION 1609 FOR WIND LOADS OF 145 MPH. RUBBER VIBRATION PAD BY A/C CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE (4) -22 GA- 1)9" WIDE HURRICANE STRAPS PER CONDENSING UNIT. A) (2) -% X%' LOBO 0307 STEEL GALV. BOLTS AND NUT EASTERNERS TO WEB OF AWMINUM STAND RAILS. 9) (3)-10-16 X )<" WAN p3 SELF DRILLING HILTI KWMK -FLEX SCREWS TO WEB OF ALUMINUM STAND RAIL 5":(6"4" PATE ANCHOR LEGS USING (4) HILD H'1 -P WITH AN EMBEDMENT OF ;i" AND A)B" BOLT ANCHOR MIN. FUR POST TENSION SLAB. (4) ANCHORS SHALL BE REWIRED PER STAND. EACH ANCHOR SHALL BE INSTALLED PER HILT SPECIFICATIONS AND, MORE SPECIFICALLY USING A HILTI MODELAHSD -GP i6• -3S" SETTING TOOL Y" XS' GALVANIZED STEEL THUMBSCREW TIGHTEN WITH TORQUE WRENCH TO REFUSAL T TY'ICAI CONDENSING UNIT ALLOWABLE LOADS PER ANCHOR ARE 390 LBS. 1 TENSION (PULLOUT) AND SOD LBS SHEAR RESULTING IN A 1,520 LBS TENS ON (PULLOUT) AND 2,400 t SHEAR CAPACITY PER BASE PI ATE. I\ 3C" 1Y. "X1)¢ "X)§" GALVANIZED STEEL I -Yi" SON 40 WAL_ CONDENSING UNIT AND SUPPOR NOT TO SCALE TI -D AIL CONDENSATE DRAIN TRAP DETAIL EDT TO SCALE CLEAN VALVE AND STRAIN'R I (TYP. OF 2) HANGER ROD THRU CHANNEL AND SECURED WITH FLAT WASHERS & NYLON LOCKING NUTS. DOUBLE DEFLECTION NEOPRENE HANGER. 0.4U" UEFLECI ON PROVIDE MIN. 6" SHEET METAL DUCT BETWEEN UNIT AND FLEX CONNECTION (FOR UNITS WITH ELECTRIC - HEAT). TRANSITION RFPI ACE -OSE KIT TO UNIT IRON THIS POINT (TYP OF 2) 1 -35' X 1 -WE" UNI -STRUT CHANNELS BELOW AIR HANDLER AND DRAIN PAN WSHP NEW STEEL FRAMING ANGLES SHALL BE 1.252X3/8 LLV. AT PERIMETER OF CURB. PROVIDE 3/16" YIELD CONNECTIONS AT EACH POINT OF CONNECTION BETWEEN STEEL ANGLES AND ROOF JOISTS. 3/8' ALL THREAD ROD RAN IINUWS IHNI) AIR HANDLER AND DRAIN PAN SUPPORTS. SECURE WITI FLAT WASHERS & NYLON LOCKING NUTS. FILTER ACCESS FLEX CONNECTION ( TOPICAL) \�- CONDENSATE DRAIN =AN, 2" HIGH X 2" LARGER THAN UNIT. PAN SHALL BE 18 GA. CALV. SHEET. CROSSED BRACED AS SEAMS SHALL BE SOLDERED. - FLCAT CONTROL SHUT -OFF SWITCH FCR UNIT SHUTDOWN N OVERFLOW CONDITIONS CONDENSER CO W:' �— STEEL BASE RAIL 14 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL ANGLE, 3 "X3" BEATING SURFACES. 1/4 INCH DIA X 1 -1/2" ZINC PLATED STEE_ SELF TAPPING SCREWS THROUGH EQUIPMENT R/4 INCH DIA X 3' ZINC PLATED SILL EXPANSION BOLTS THROUGH CONCRETE. ,,AIR FLOW CONDENSING LNIT CONDENSING UNIT S TTEL BASE RAILS AS A COMPONENT OF THE EQUIPMENT. 4 -INCH THICK REINFORCED CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. EQUIPMENT SECUREMENI, PROVIDE TIW) PER LONGEST TWO SIDES OF EQUIPMENT. SEE ENLARGED VIEW FOR ATTACHMENT REQUIREMENTS. CONDENSING UNIT TIE DOWN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SUSPENDED WSHP INSTALLATION DETAIL HOT TO SCALE CLEVIS HANGER SCHEDULE NOM. PIPE SIZE •A• "B' 'G' "Cr M SPAHCINNG R 3/8" 3/8" 2 -1/8' 2 -1/2" 1 -7/16' 7 -0" 1/2" 3/8" 2 -5/8" 3" 1 -7/16' 7 -0" 3/4" 3/8" 2 -3/8" 2 -7/8' 1 -7/16' 7 -0" 1• 3/8" 3 -1/8" 3 -7/8" 1 -7/8" 7 -0" 1 -1/4" 3/8" 2 -3/4" 3-5/8' 1 -1/4" 1 -0" 1- 1/2" 3/8" 2 -3/4" 3-5/8• 1 -1/4" 8-0" 2" 3/8" 3' 4-1/4' 4-1/4' 10' -0" 2 -1/2" 1/2" 3 -5/8' 5 -1/8" 1 -1/2" 11' -0" 3" 1/2' 4 -6/8" 6-3/8' 2 -1 /B" 12' -0" 4" 5/8" 5 -'/4" 7 -1/2" 2' 14' -0" 5" 5/B' 6 -'/8" 8-7/8 2 -3/8" 16' -0' 8" 3/4' 7' 10 -3/8" 2 -3/8• 17 -0' ALL THREADED -ANGER R OOONG NUT SUPPORT NUT HEAVY DUTY �G_EVIS HANCE INSULATION WITH VAPOR BARRIER 1/2" - ALL IHIREAUEU HANGER ROD STANDARD PIPE STRAP RUBBER ISOLATION PAD FCR BARE PIPES LOOTING NUT UNISTRUT CHANNEL /2" 1 -1/2 IMN. SUPPORT NUT W/'WASHER PFIN 16 GA. GALMD STEEL SADDLE 3 TIMES PIPE DIA. OR 9" MIN LENGTH.-, /W U ..I 18 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL SADDLE 3 TIMES PIPE DIAL OT 9" MIN LENGTH. PIPE HANGER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE INSTALL PER UL SYSTEM C --A) -1291 USE -101 FS -ONE MAX FIRESTOP SEALANT M N. 2-1/2" METAL PIPE TYPE STEEL PPE(SCH. 10 OR HEAVIER) MAX. DIA. 30" CAST 15011 PIPE 30" COPPER PIPE 6" STEEL CONDUIT 6" ETA' 4' METAL PIPE THROUGH CONCRETE OVER METAL DECKING (2 -HR) DETAIL NOT TO SCALE I W I HV/AC REPLACEMENT -PHASE II SPECTRUM FIELD ae+wanvo+ CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA w+0+na rrwP.An. Mechanical Details M301 • Table of Contents APPENDIX OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION PRE QUALIFICATION APPLICATION 3 pages ASBESTOS REPORT 6 pages • • APPENDIX i Updated 2/11/2016 • earwater Instructions to Qualify for Bidding on Clearwater Construction Projects In order to be eligible to bid for City of Clearwater construction projects a contractor must be prequalified with the Engineering Department's Construction Division. The purpose of pre -qualification is to provide the City with reasonable assurance that your organization has the financial assets, resources, work force and work experience to successfully complete construction contract agreements with the City. If your company is interested in becoming prequalified or wishes to reapply for pre -qualification, please fill out the attached application. In order for your application to be considered complete and begin the approval process you will need to submit all of the following items with your application: • A current financial statement completed within the past year (City policy dictates that we return this item to you after the approval process is completed. We do not make copies or retain this financial information. If you submit electronically the file will be deleted following approval.) • Three letters of reference, on the owner's letterhead, written within the past three years, that includes the contractor's performance on a specific project. The letter should include a brief description of the project, start and end dates, dollar amount of contract and owner comments on the quality of workmanship and satisfaction of work completed. • A List of major projects active and completed within the past three years. Each project must include the type of work, contract dollar amount, start and completion dates, name and contact information of project owner representative. • A copy of all current contractor licenses. Pre -qualification status lasts for three (3) years from approval date and is limited to particular construction categories or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully completed construction projects or extensive work in the category in conjunction with larger project work. Included in the application are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre - qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check all categories for which your firm is seeking pre -qualification approval. To receive approval in a particular construction category, your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be included in your firm's completed project list. In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources, and employees on your firm's direct payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient work force or insufficient resources will not be approved for pre -qualification or will not receive pre -qualification in particular work categories. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm pre -qualification status before a bid opening. Please return the application and submittal items to: Construction Specialist City of Clearwater Engineering P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 • Or e-mail to: Valerie.craigamyclearwater.com If you have any questions during this process please contact the Construction Specialist at 727-562-4509 or e-mail Valerie.craiqamvclearwater.com. KM 7/10/14 • • Application to Qualify for Bidding on Clearwater Construction Protects Contractor Firm Name: Contact Person Name & Title: Mailin • Address: Ci , State & Zi • : Contact Phone Number: Fax Number: E-mail Address: Com • an Website: T •e of Or• anization Individua , Cor. oration, Partnershi •, etc.: Date or. anization be. an under . resent name: Other names and dates or. anization has existed as: List of Or. anization Leadershi • President, Vice President, Secreta , Treasurer, Partners, etc. : References: 1 2 3 Contractor's License Number attach co • : Individual Holdin • License: Issuin • Authori : Classification of License: NI be • Full ti e e •t4-i.iif-,ir,k.JiLl.jamat#I xiiiTi Present value and type of all construction and operational equipment directly owned by the applicant Information ma be obtained from most recent financial statement and include Ion • term lease/ • urchase e • ui • ment : Value: ME .. - 'c•1a I i I I IILL Ia'L 1 t ii -i• iL•i.= .fi ' i i.ii:���;t i .L�•�{.� .'? ., „ e e - . T' ,? The information in this application and all attachments included with the application is true and correct to the best of m knowled • e. Or • anization Name: Print Name and Title: Si • nature: Date Si • ned: KM 7/10/14 • The pre -qualification to bid limitation is an amount of dollars equal to the amount of the largest single construction project which has been successfully completed by the Contractor. • This amount is limited to the particular construction categories in which the Contractor is approved to perform work. • The Contractor may request an adjustment after successfully completing larger construction projects or providing evidence where two or more similar projects were completed by the Contractor at the same time. The combined amount of these simultaneous projects may be more than the largest single project accomplished to increase your bid limit. This amount will be considered as the pre -qualification amount up to an amount equal to 150% of the largest single project amount. • Pre -qualification amounts and categories may be limited as warranted by the City's experience with the Contractor's construction projects. • Please attach a list of major projects active and completed within the past three years. Each project must include the type of work, contract dollar amount, start and completion dates, name and contact information of project representative. Largest Single Project COMPLETED: Amount of Contract: Start and End Dates: Type of Work: Owner/Representative: Address: Phone Number: Email Address: • Pre -qualification is limited to particular construction categories or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully completed construction projects or extensive work in the category as part of larger project work. • To receive approval in a particular construction category your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be included in your firm's attached competed project list. • In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources and employees on your firm's direct payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient workforce or resources will not be approved and will not receive pre -qualification in particular work categories. The following are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre - qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check all categories for which your firm is seeking pre -qualification approval. Asphaltic Concrete Resurfacing Landscape and Irrigation Bridge Construction and Modification Marine Construction Commercial Buildings Marine Dredging Commercial Swimming Pools Roadway and Parking Lot Construction Concrete Flat Work (curbs, walks, courts, etc.) Sanitary Pump Station Construction Management Services Sanitary and Storm Sewers Demolition Specialty Concrete Repair & Coating Work Design Build Stormwater Management Construction Electrical Tennis Courts Excavation/Site Work Traffic Signalization Fiber Optic Urban Streetscape Gunite Restoration Wastewater & Water Treatment Facilites Horizontal Directional Drilling Water and Force Mains Industrial Painting Well Construction Other: Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning X KM 7/10/14 • • GEGreenfield Environmental June 6, 2016 City of Clearwater Parks and Recreation Department Mr. Leroy Chin 100 South Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, Florida 33756 RE: REVISED PRE -RENOVATION ASBESTOS SURVEYS AT SELECT AREAS OF BRIGHT HOUSE FIELD LOCATED AT 601 OLD COACHMAN ROAD IN CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Dear Mr. Chin: Surveys for asbestos -containing materials (AGMs) were conducted on May 30 and June 6, 2016 by EPA accredited inspector Eric Caplan of Greenfield Environmental, Inc. (GE) at select areas of the above-mentioned structure. The purpose of these asbestos surveys were to identify asbestos containing materials at the above-mentioned area prior to upcoming renovation activities. The sampling was conducted for EPA NESHAP compliance prior to renovation activities. GE is a Florida Licensed Asbestos Consulting Firm with a corresponding license number of ZA-0000268. The sampling was performed in accordance with the requirements of Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 763 for suspect ACMs. The EPA regulations require that sample locations be randomly selected. All suspect asbestos -containing materials and PACM (materials presumed to contain asbestos under the OSHA Asbestos Rule, 29 CFR 1910) were identified. The samples collected from the areas were labeled and transported to Air Quality Environmental, Inc. for analysis. Air Quality Environmental, Inc. is a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited laboratory (NVLAP No. 200759-0). Bright House Field was observed to be a baseball complex with several adjoining office areas and public terrace areas. The HVAC system throughout the complex consisted of sheet metal ductwork and metal flexduct. Exterior finishes consisted of rolled roofing materials and EFS wall finish material. The scope of work for this survey is limited to the stadium roof, EIFS material at select terrace wall areas, HVAC system, stadium boiler and holding tank, and painting projects focused on exterior stairwell railings, concourse overhangs, select exterior doors, exterior fencing, batters eye structure, foul poles, outfield bridge railings, marquis sign pole, backstop poles, second level railings and overhangs, and select galvanized metal water lines and fire lines. 432 3rd Street North, St. Petersburg, FL 33701 • Phone: 727.896.1266 • Fax: 727.896.1566 • • • A total of the twenty one (21) samples were collected from the above mentioned areas. The laboratory analytical results indicated that none of the materials sampled contained asbestos in amounts greater than one percent (1%). As such, no specialized asbestos handling or disposal techniques are required prior to or during repair/renovation activities. Please see the attached Summary of Laboratory Analysis for analytical results and sample locations. GE is pleased to have been of assistance to you on this project and we look forward to working with you in the future. If you have any questions or if we can be of any further service, please do not hesitate to call us at (727) 896-1266. Sincerely, GREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL, INC. ZZ --- Eric Caplan Michael W. Rothenburg, PE EPA Accredited Inspector Florida Licensed Asbestos onsultant #1109201501 #EA -0000041 1051-1100 RASLetter Revised • SUMMARY OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS BRIGHT HOUSE FIELD - SELECT AREAS LOCATED AT 601 OLD COACHMAN ROAD CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Hcmac t Area ,_.. ;Sample Number Description! Location Asbestos Content ..anti:; Friability Condition k Appro, .� 01 01 02 03 Gray Rolled Roofing Material Over Black Mastic Located at Roof Areas Throughout No Asbestos Detected Non- Friable Good 02 04 05 06 White Mastic on Pillar Penetrations Located at Roof Areas Throughout No Asbestos Detected Non - Friable Good 03 07 08 09 Black Mastic on Penetrations Located at Roof Areas Throughout No Asbestos Detected Non - Friable Good )04 10 11 12 Gray Mastic on Metal Ductwork Seams Located Throughout Facilities HVAC System No Asbestos Detected Non - Friable Good 05 13 14 15 Tan EIFS Material Located at Select Terrace Area Walls No Asbestos Detected Friable Good 06 16 17 18 White Mastic on Flex Ductwork Seams Located Throughout Facilities HVAC System No Asbestos Detected Non- Friable Good ------ 07 19 20 21 White Insulation Material at Water Lines Connected to Holding Tank and Water Heater Located at Facilities Boiler Room No Asbestos Detected Friable Good • • • • CERTIFICATIONS R.otterts 1,1,v frovvvl+teo,t Gi L Yrc i-vvi-14,0, AVeiA.tte N Sevuivott, FL 3.3:7:0 727-533-3067 Asbestos Serve Mechar cat (i tspectar) tvt,itr aL Tra%14g This, is to aert"L'E'td that TYal,ptivt,s was i.44. aocorca w'h Tftle c -f TSCA, 4o CFR Part 3. , ppevt t i x C to Subpart E cis r evL .ec Date of Exa vu t vt.at#.o y it/ '2015 Date Of Course: 12/ -/2415-11.e /2015 expi,ratt avt. Date it!'3 /2o1 Cevti f Kate # 1i0 201501 Cau.rse # ft_41000631 •I ovitier FL490003810 1vstrvator STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION ASBESTOS LICENSING UNIT (850) 487-1395 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 GREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL INC MICHAEL ROTHENBURG 432 3RD STREET NORTH ST. PETERSBURG FL 33701 Congratulations! With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers, from boxers to barbecue restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you better. For information about our services, please log onto www.myfloridalicense.com. There you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that impact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the Department's initiatives. Our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We constant!y strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. Thank you for doing business in Florida, and congratulations on your new license! RICK BCD r r, -GOVERNOR • DETACH HERE STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFE GULATION ZA0000268 �'�' ` . O9t10/2101.5. IS'L10EMSED-.mndtettha proVVYstonS ct.V 459 fS.- Expiration date . NOV 30;201T• • • ti509!0 01639 KEtttAWSflit-•SEORETAR'f-- _ STAT of FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION ASB OS LICENSING UNIT f• Li ;ttiSE N'UNIBErt -ASS BUSINESS ORGANIZATION Named below.iS•:LIOENSED Uhler thepr�;�l of Chap -4619 FS. tee. -140V10;.2017 yr 0 L • ISSUED: 09!10/2015 rIIRPI AY AR RFC]I IIRFfl RY I AW SFC] it 1 15n91nnnn2s. q • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL/BID BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 15 SECTION V Page i Updated: 2/6/2017 THE PROSURE GROUP INC. • KEN BURKE, CLERK OF COURT AND COMPTROLLER PINELLAS COUNTY, FL INST# 2017339901 11/07/2017 09:50 AM OFF REC BK: 19832 PG: 2117-2120 DocType:BOND RECORDING: $35.50 This is the front page of the performance/payment bond issued in compliance with Florida Statute Chapter 255.05 THE PROVISIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF SECTION 255.05 FLORIDA STATUTES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATIONS IN SECTIONS 255.05(2) AND 255.05(10), ARE INCORPORATED IN THIS BOND BY REFERENCE • Bond Number: 482887P Surety in which bond's written: Developers Surety and Indemnity Company Local Address: 100 2nd Ave South, St. Petersburg, FL 33701 Local Phone Number: (727) 822-5610 Contractor/Principal Name: Kenyon & Partners, Inc. Address: 3203 Queen Palm Dr., Tampa, FL 33619 Phone: (813) 241-6568 Owner of Property / Contracting Entity: City of Clearwater Address: 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Suite 220 Belleair, FL 33756 Phone: (727) 562-4750 Contract Number: 16 -0023 -PR -D Project Name: Spectrum Field Phase 2 - HVAC Renovations Project Address: 601 Old Coachman Rd. Clearwater, FL 33765 Project Description: HVAC Renovations This bond has been furnished to comply with the requirements of F.S.A. 255.05. This bond is hereby amended such that all provisions and limitations, including conditions, motive and time limitation of F.S.A. 255.05 are incorporated herein by reference. Any provisions of this bond which conflicts with or purports to grant broader or more expanded coverage in excess of the minimum requirements of the applicable statute shall be deemed herefrom. This bond is a statutory bond, not a common law bond. • This is the front page of the bond regardless of preprinted numbers on the other pages issued in compliance with F.S.A. 255.05 Bonding. For A Better Tomorrow 7217 Benjamin Road, Tampa, FL 33634 I PH 813.243.1110 I FAX 813.243.1109 I www.prosuregroup.com Email contractbonds@prosuregroup.com • • SECTION V — Contract Documents Bond No.: 482887P PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (I) This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified copy of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CONTRACTOR Kenyon & Partners, Inc. [name] 3203 Queen Palm Drive SURETY OWNER Developers Surety and Indemnity Company City of Clearwater [Parks '& Recreation Dept.] 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 (727) 562-[4856]' Tampa, FL 33619 [principal business address]! (813) 241-6568 [phone number]; [name] 100 2nd Ave. South St. Petersburg, FL 33701 [principal business mess] (727) 822-5610 [phone number] PROJECT NAME: SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 - HV/AC RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO.: 16 -0023 -PR -D PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Spectrum Field, 601 Old Coachman Road North, Clearwater Florida, 33765 Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, materials and all insurances as necessary for removal and replacement of HVAC systems, all associated necessary work such as shown on the contract documents and provide a complete operating HVAC systems to the satisfaction of the Owner. BY THIS BOND, We, Kenyon & Partners, Inc. , as Contractor, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Company , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $ 310,251.60------ for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor: 1. Performs the contract dated , between Contractor and Owner for construction of SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 - HV/AC RENOVATIONS the contract documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and • SECTION V Page 1 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents • PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (2) • Bond No.: 482887P 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and 4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the performance of the construction contract; and 5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. 6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. 7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of November , 20 17 . (If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required). (If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal). Kenyon & Partners, Inc. Tyra LEGAL NAME F CONTR, CTOR. orporat ecretary or Witness Print Name: (affix corporate seal) • SECTION V By: Title: Preslden Print Name: Dean Kenyon WITNESS: Print Name: (7,zs4.it //. /L ui.:441 ,,!111f1{fe Developers Surety and Indemnit�ii' k • (Corporate Suretyj�• = S By: 144,;:i.4L- R r i r: ATTORNLY-IN-FACT & Licensed F �ResrTient David B. Shick At,;enf #At1.16 Print Name: (affix corporate seal) (Power of Attorney must be attached) Page 2 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY PO Box 19725, IRVINE, CA 92623 (949) 263-3300 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS that except as expressly limited, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, does hereby make, constitute and appoint: ***David B. Shick*** as its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, deliver and acknowledge, for and on behalf of said corporation, as surety, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship giving and granting unto said Attomey(s)-in-Fact full power and authority to do and to perform every act necessary, requisite or proper to be done in connection therewith as each of said corporation could do, but reserving to each of said corporation full power of substitution and revocation, and all of the acts of said Attomey(s)-in-Fad, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, effective as of January 1st, 2008. RESOLVED, that a combination of any two of the Chairman of the Board, the President, any Executive Vice -President, Senior Vice -President or Vice -President of the corporation be, and that each of them hereby is, authorized to execute this Power of Attorney, qualifying the attomey(s) named in the Power of Attorney to execute, on behalf of the corporation, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship; and that the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary of the corporation be, and each of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney; RESOLVED, FURTHER, that the signatures of such officers may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures shall be valid and binding upon the corporation when so affixed and in the future with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its officers and attested by its Secretary or Assistant Secretary this 6th day of Feburary, 2017. By: By: Daniel Young, Senior Vice -President Mark Lansdon, Vice -President State of California County of Orange U 1936!x` A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. On February 6, 2017 personally appeared Date before me, Lucille Raymond, Notary Public Here Insert Name and Title of the Officer Daniel Young and Mark Lansdon LUCILLE RAYMOND Commission utt 2081945 Notary Public - California Orange County Comm. Expires Oct 13 2018 Place Notary Seal Above Name(s) of Signer(s) who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature CERTIFICATE Lucy ond, Notary Public The undersigned, as Secretary or Assistant Secretary of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY or INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, does hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked and, furthermore, that the provisions of the resolutioReeflWtespective Boards of Directors of said corporations set forth in the Power of Attorney are in force as of the date of this Certificate. ���`{ Al: November . 2017 •° • 44''6 w• )13 By:•• This Certificate is executed in the City of Irvine, California, this day of Cassie Jisford, Assistant S -' R `tary ATS -1004 (02/17) ei. F Via, i lir�lH.'NhP� [ 1# 411 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this !' day of , 200 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and of the City of County of and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". [Or, if out of: state:] This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter a/anr- business' in the State of Florida, of the . City andState of 20 by and between the. City designated' as the "City", and State) Corporation authorized to do County of he "Contractor". , hereinafter desi WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: PROJECT NAME: [Spectrum Field Phase 2 - HVAC Renovations PROJECT NO.: [ 16 -0023 -PR -D in the amount of $ 310,251.60 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. SECTION V Page 3 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (2) aTHE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2). • • In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. SECTION V Page 4 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (3) IIIIn addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement agrees to comply with public records law. • • IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS AT 727-562-4092, Rosemarie.Call@myclearwater.com, 112 S. Osceola Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756 The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract , transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. t) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: SECTION V Page 5 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (4) 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY,/�JFLORID, By: LO J&t z'AA, 6 William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: By: — TPo(\cnC'Aaco, George N. Cretekos, Mayor Contractor must indicate whether: Corporation, Partnership, Attest: Rosemarie Call City Clerk Approv, Mat(hdw M. Smith Assistant City Attorney Company, or Individual (Contractor) By: c" (SEAL) Print Na e: ec1Y 1,AyoA Title: rre,.Q1.- The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 6 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT TO OWNER: City of Clearwater PROJECT NAME: Spectrum Field Phase 2 - HVAC Renovations Parks & Recreation PROJECT NO.: 16 -0023 -PR -D 100 S. Myrtle Ave. CONTRACT DATE: [ 7 Clearwater, FL 33756 BOND NO. : f 1, recorded in O.R. Book Page [ 1, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. CONTRACTOR: Kenyon & Partners, Inc. Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: [insert name of Surety] [address] [address] on bond of Kenyon & Partners, Inc. 3203 Queen Palm Dr. Tampa, FL 33619 ,SURETY, ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of Attest: (Seal): ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) SECTION V Page 7 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL/BID BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) Bond No.: N/A • KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Kenyon & Partners, Inc. as Contractor, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Company as Surety, whose address is 17771 Cowan, Irvine, CA 92614 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of Amount Bid in U.S. Dollars ($ 10% ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. • • The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Kenyon & Partners, Inc. as Contractor, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Company as Surety, for work specified as: Spectrum Field HVAC Renovation project #16 -0023 -PR -D all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Principal must indicate whether: X Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual Signed this 21st day of September , 2017 Kenyon & Partners, Inc. Contractor By: Preside/ft Title Developers Surett and Indemnity Company a. Surety David B. Shick, A ortiey-in-F*1& LicensetDFL Resident Agent #A241176 The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his:title; where the, person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 8 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY PO Box 19725, IRVINE, CA 92623 (949) 263-3300 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS that except as expressly limited, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, does hereby make, constitute and appoint: ***David B. Shick*** as its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, deliver and acknowledge, for and on behalf of said corporation, as surety, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship giving and granting unto said Attomey(s)-in-Fact full power and authority to do and to perform every act necessary, requisite or proper to be done in connection therewith as each of said corporation could do, but reserving to each of said corporation full power of substitution and revocation, and all of the acts of said Attorney(s)-in-Fact, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, effective as of January 1st, 2008. RESOLVED, that a combination of any two of the Chairman of the Board, the President, any Executive Vice -President, Senior Vice -President or Vice -President of the corporation be, and that each of them hereby is, authorized to execute this Power of Attorney, qualifying the attomey(s) named in the Power of Attorney to execute, on behalf of the corporation, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship; and that the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary of the corporation be, and each of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney; RESOLVED, FURTHER, that the signatures of such officers may be affixed to any such Power of Attomey or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attomey or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures shall be valid and binding upon the corporation when so affixed and in the future with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its officers and attested by its Secretary or Assistant Secretary this 6th day of Feburary, 2017. By: By: Daniel Young, Senior Vice -President Mark Lansdon, Vice -President State of California County of Orange 1936 "` 1• O A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. On February 6, 2017 personally appeared Date before me, Lucille Raymond, Notary Public Here Insert Name and Title of the Officer Daniel Young and Mark Lansdon LUCILLE RAYMOND Commission N 2081945 Notary Public - California Orange County i_`•_ _' Mx Comm. Isere! Oct 13`2014 Place Notary Seal Above Name(s) of signa(s) who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature CERTIFICATE Lucil ond, Notary Public The undersigned, as Secretary or Assistant Secretary of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY or INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, does hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attomey remains in full force and has not been revoked and, furthermore, that the provisions of the resolutions of the respective Boards of Directors of said corporations set forth in the Power of Attorney are in force as of the date of this Certificate. By: • ATS -1004 (02/17) This Certificate is executed in the City of Irvine, Califomia, this e40414Zie Cassie Jrrisford, Assistant S ',7`tary 21st day of September , 2017. ,;fy AND 7° 21st y ,R;a` 4t �'di 1936 •O. SECTION V — Contract Documents AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA • COUNTY OF Hi l l shorn -ugh) • Dean Kenyon , being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of Kenyon & Partners, Inc. a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 3203 Queen Palm Drive Tampa Hillsborough FL (Street & Number) (City) (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of Kenyon & Partners, Inc. (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Dean Kenyon is President (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for Kenyon & Partners, Inc. or said corporation by virtue of (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). Dean Kenon t Affi Sworn to before me this 21 day of September ,20 17 • SECTION V Notary Public Diane Trout Type/print/stamp name of Notary Title or rank, and Serial No., if any , Diane Trout Commission 1� 00035478 • Expires: October 3, 2020 Bonded thru Aaron Notary Page 9 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA • COUNTY OF Hillsborough) • • Dean Kenyon being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is President of Kenyon & Partners, Inc. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof Affi Sworn to and subscribed before me this 21 day of September Notary Public , 2017 491: ,,� :d�/,�� Diane Trout ; •, Commission # GG035478 Expires: October 3, 2020 ' Bonded thru Aaron Notary SECTION V Page 10 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 - HV/AC RENOVATIONS CONTRACT 16 -0023 -PR -D and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 - HV/AC RENOVATIONS CONTRACT 16 -0023 -PR -D Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: • If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. • SECTION V Page 11 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (2) Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on • Bank, for the sum of Thirty -One Thousand Twenty -Five and 16/100 dollars ($ 31, 025.16 ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). • • The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: Dean Kenyon Ted S. Hansen, Sr. Dean Kenyon ADDRESSES: Signature of Bidder: The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: /� l By: ` Jne4 n j�1" Title: Pr'D'Iderrf Company Legal Name: Kenyon & Partners, Inc . Doing Business As (if different than above): Business Address of Bidder: 3203 Queen Palm Drive City and State: Tampa , FL Zip Code 33619 Phone: 813-241-6568 Email Address: dean.kenyon@kenyonandpartners.com Dated at Kenyon & Partners, Inc , this 21 day of September , A.D., 2017 SECTION V Page 12 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET II/ PROJECT: SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 HV/AC RENOVATIONS CONTRACT 16 -0023 -PR -D • • Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 9 / 7 / 17 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Kenyon & Partners, Inc. (Name of Bidder) (Si President (Title of Officer) 9/21/17 (Date) SECTION V Page 13 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S BID PROPOSAL PROJECT: SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 HV/AC RENOVATIONS CONTRACT 16 -0023 -PR -D ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT OTY. PRICE PRICE Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, materials and all insurances as necessary for removal and replacement of HVAC systems, all associated necessary work such as (removed HVAC system & construction debris disposed off site, removal and replacement of ceiling tile & grid, disconnect and reconnect of electrical service to heat pump/air handler - air handling units, removal and replacement of hose kits with new, new isolation valves, all existing ductwork to remain and undisturbed except at connection to HVAC units being replaced, all refrigerant piping and condensate piping to remain unless noted, remove, clean and reinstall balancing valves and strainers, replace water source heat pumps and split systems as shown, thermostat controls shall be replace in kind; provide any and all miscellaneous necessary items as required to provide a complete operational HVAC systems) shown on the contract documents and provide a complete operating HVAC systems to the satisfaction of the Owner, contractor shall provide all necessary items for a complete system and items not listed shall be included somewhere in the bid items listed below: BID ITEMS: 1. Remove & replace WSHP 1.5 Tons. HP -113 HVAC unit include new isolation valve, hose kit, remove & replace controls, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work Each 1 2. Remove & replace WSHP 2 Tons. HP -110 & HP -306 HVAC unit include new isolation valve, hose kit, remove & replace controls, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work. Each 2 3. Remove & replace WSHP 3 Tons. HP -100A, HP -101, HP -108, HP -116, HP -201, HP -205, HP -302 & HP -303 HVAC unit include new isolation valve, hose kit, remove & replace controls with new, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work 4. Remove & replace WSHP 3.5 Tons. HP -100C, HP -106, HP -112 & HP -203 units include new isolation valve, hose kit, remove & replace controls with new, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work. 5. Remove & replace WSHP 4 Tons. HP -107, & HP -202 HVAC unit include new isolation valve, hose kit, remove & replace controls with new, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work Each 8 $5,368.810 $5,368.81 $5,599.365 $11,198.73 $5,969.749 $47,757.99 Each 4 $6,148.573 $24,594.29 Each 2 $6,296.470 $12,592.94 SECTION V Page 14 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S BID PROPOSAL (continued ....) PROJECT: SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 HV/AC RENOVATIONS CONTRACT 16 -0023 -PR -D ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY. UNIT TOTAL PRICE PRICE 6. Remove & replace WSHP 5 Tons, HP -114A, HP -207A, HP -207B, HP -301, HP -304, & HP -305 HVAC unit include new isolation valve, hose kit, remove & replace controls with new, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work Each 6 $7,010.547 $42,063.28 7. Remove an replace Split HVAC System 4 Tons, AH & CU -104 HVAC units, remove & replace controls with new, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work Each 1 $7,403.090 $7,403.09 8. Provide new Split HVAC System 5 Tons, AH & CU -103 HVAC units, remove & replace controls with new, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work Each 1 $11,980.580 $11,980.58 9. Provide new Split HVAC System 10 Tons, AH & CU -101 & 102 HVAC units, remove & re lace controls with new, provide all miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC unit as stated in the contact documents and above scope of work Each 2 $14,098.230 $28,196.46 10. Provide new mini Split HVAC System 3 Tons, AH & CU 301 & 302 include copper continues piping and wrap as required, include new NEMA 3R 22.5 KVA 3 PH Mini Power Center Panel & Transformer Combo provide all necessary roof protection & all other miscellaneous items to provide a complete operational HVAC system in the Diamond Club Concession Each 2 $18,029.590 $36,059.18 11. Provide Testing & Balance of HVAC System, Provide copy of Test & Balance report in 0 &M Manual LS 1 12. Extended 5 year warranty of all HVAC Compressors of bid items LS 1 13. General Conditions/Supervision LS 1 14. Profit and Overhead LS 1 $10,725.00 -0- $16,869.99 $22,249.49 SECTION V Page 15 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S BID PROPOSAL (continued ....) PROJECT: SPECTRUM FIELD PHASE 2 HV/AC RENOVATIONS CONTRACT 16 -0023 -PR -D ITEM 1110 NO. DESCRIPTION • UNIT QTY. UNIT TOTAL PRICE PRICE 15. Performance bond L. S. 1 16. Sub Total of items 1 —15 $ 282,046.91 17. *10% Contingency of line 16 *(Note contingency funds shall only utilized upon written approval by the Owner or the owner's representative to utilize these fund for additional Scope of Work not included in items 1-15 of the Bill of Quantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of his contract shall be returned to the Owner by closing out purchase order short during close out of the contract purchase order.) $4,987.08 $ 28 204.69 18. Grand Total items 1 through 15 Bid Items plus 10% Contingency $ 310,251.60 CONTRACTOR NAME: Kenyon & Partners, Inc. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ 310,251.60 (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: Three hundred ten thousand two hundred fifty-one dollars and sixth cents (Words) A. For extra work: OH&P percentage for materials purchased on a time and material (T&M) basis. ADD 15 B. For extra work: OH&P percentage for general contractor for subcontractor services on additional work. ADD 15 % C. For extra work: Labor rate for work performed on a time and material basis (includes all taxes and fringe benefits). ADD $ 67.50 /HR I. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE: 1. The contractor agrees to commence work within 7 calendar days from execution of contract and notice to proceed. 2. The contractor further agrees to complete the work within 120 calendar days from execution of contract and notice to proceed per the referenced schedule in the Invitation to Bid. THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY ITEMS AND OR REJECT ALL BIDS THE TOTAL PRICE SHALL BE BASED ON ITEMS SELECTED BY THE OWNER OF THIS PROJECT. SECTION V Page 16 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity/Corporation STATE OF COUNTY OF The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of , 20 , by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. Notary Public Printed Name My Commission Expires: NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SECTION V Page 17 of 17 Updated: 2/6/2017 ACCORD �� CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 10/25/2017 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. orIMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. SUBROGATION 15 WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on his certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement®. PRODUCER Adcock -Adcock Insurance Agency 315 W. Fletcher Ave. Tampa FL 33612-3414 CONT: CONTACT Tina Cardinale PHONECNo Flay 813-933-6691 FAX W)- (A/C Nor no Bess: Cardinalet@adcock-insurance.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A:Southern-Owners Insurance Co. 10190 INSURED 26799 Kenyon & Partners, Inc 3203 Queen Palm Drive Tampa FL 33619-1331 INSURER B :Bridgefield Employers Ins Co 10701 INSURER c :Admiral Insurance Co. 24856 INsuRERD:Owners Insurance Co. 32700 INSURER E : INSURER F : X COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 2085455615 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS INSR LTRINSD TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM/DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP IMM/DD/YYYYI LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 20658683 10(2512017 10/25/2018 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO PREMISES (EaENTED occurrence) $300,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $10,000 PERSONAL &ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 GE 'L AGGREGATE POLICY OTHER: X LIMIT APPLIES JECT PER: LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 $ D AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY ANY AUTO OWNED HONLY HIRED AUTOS ONLY —NON X + SCHEDULED AUTOS -OWNED AUTOS ONLY 4474434602 10/25/2017 10/25/2018 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ PIP $10,000 A X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE 4474434601 10/25/2017 10/2512018 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 AGGREGATE $5,000,000 $ DED X RETENT ON $10,000 B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY OFFICER/MEM ER PARTNER E ECUTIVE (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below YNN N / A 83052197 1/15/2017 1/15/2018PER X STATUTE OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 C Professional Liability E0000020933-06 10/25/2017 10/25/2018 Aggregate Limit 3,000,000 Each Claim 3,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) Project#16-0023-PR-D, Spectrum field Phase 2 -HVAC Renovations City of Clearwater is included as Additional Insured on a Primary & Non -Contributory basis under General Liability policy Blanket Additional Insured endorsement, per form #55373, attached, if terms/requirements are met and subject to all policy conditions, wording, terms, etc. City of Clearwater is included as Additional Insured under Automobile Liability per Blanket Additional Insured endorsement form 89304, attached, if terms/requirements are met and subject to all policy conditions, wording, terms, etc. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION L I City of Clearwater Purchasing Attn:• P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater FL 33758-4748 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZEDREPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25 (2016/03) © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. • The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD • ADDENDUM NO. 1 FOR SPECTRUM FIELD HVAC CONTRACT 16 -0023 -PR -A This Addendum is issued to provide Pre -Bid Meeting Questions and Answers, Condition of Building Permit and responses, revised drawings, Bidders Proposal additions base on Building Permit Conditions and are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. Please attach this addendum to the Contract Documents in your possession. Item 1 — Questions and Answers from Pre Bid Meeting: 1. Who is the existing fire alarm company? Response: Piper Fire 13075 US 19 N Clearwater, FL 33764 727-581- 9339 (Main line) 727-581-8332 (Fax) 2. What is the fee for the Asbestos Survey? Response: Please for fee contact: Pinellas County Air Quality 509 East Avenue South, Ste. 138 Clearwater, FL 33756 (727) 464-4422 3. Is this job required to conform to the Davis Beacon Act? Response: No, this project is not funded with Federal Funds. • 4. What will the start date be for the project? Response: Start date will be dependent on the date of the contract award and completion of surety bond recorded with Pinellas County Court House • 5. Is there a chance bids will have only some components awarded to a contractor? Response: The Owners intention to award the entire project. 6. Where the electrical disconnects for the units? Response: Yes there is a electrical disconnect for each unit and are located nearby of a/c units to be removed and replaced. 7. Will all areas be accessible to view during this pre-bid meeting? Response: Yes. 8. Note: All but two units are replacements, two units that are entirely new to the site. 9. Are the line sets to be replaced for all DX Split units? Response: Replacement of all line sets. Any lines to remain will be called out in this addendum. 10. Is a licensed electrician needed to reconnect all the replacement units? Response: Successful bidder shall use best means and practices for completing the scope of work for this project. 11. Will touch-up paint be provided? Response: Yes, touchup paint will be made available for use around thermostats and such. 1 • • • ADDENDUM NO. 1 FOR SPECTRUM FIELD HVAC CONTRACT 16 -0023 -PR -A 12. May we mount condensing units be mounted with brackets on the exterior parapet walls of the Diamond Club concession in lieu of puncturing the existing roofing system? Response: The Owner has some reservations of mounting condensing unit on parapet wall because of the waterproof membrane. The Owner recommends the prospective bidders to contact our current roofing contractor for recommendation of roof or parapet mount. Contact: Craig O'Hara The Garland Company, Inc. Building Envelope Solutions and Products Area Manager - West Central & SW Florida Cell : 813.777.1745 Email : cohara a( arlandind.com Item 2 — Response to Building permit Comments — BCP2017-07661 — one page. Item 3 — Revised M -C Drawing 1 sheet Item 4 — Section V — revised bidders proposal add contractor to provide duct mounted smoke detectors 17 pages. End of Addendum No. 1 2 • August 17, 2017 • • Mr. Mike Coccia City of Clearwater Planning & Development Dept. PO Box 4748 100 South Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 RE: Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Permit No. BCP2017-07661 GEL Project No. 17071 Dear Mr. Coccia: The following are my responses to the permit comments dated August 4, 2017: Mechanical Plan Review COMMENT 1: PLEASE NOTE, ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS MAY BE NECESSARY BASED ON THE RESPONSES TO CONDITIONS OR TO NEW INFORMATION NOT ON HAND AT TIME OF REVIEW. NOTE: PLEASE CLOUD ANY/ALL CHANGES ON THE PLANS BEFORE RETURNING THEM FOR RE REVIEW. A RESPONSE LETTER SHALL BE SUBMITTED WITH ALL RESPONSES FOR CLARIFICATION. PLEASE INDICATE IN RESPONSE LETTER THE SHEET NUMBER WHERE THE CHANGE WAS MADE. Response: Will comply. Revised sheet M101 C has been clouded with changes. COMMENT 2: PLEASE CLARIFY IF REQUIRED AHU SMOKE DETECTORS WILL BE INTERLOCKED WITH BUILDING ALARM OR BE CONNECTED TO SEPARATE A/V DEVICE PER 606.4.1 Response: Will comply. AHU-101 and AHU-102 will need duct mounted smoke detectors in the supply and retum. The duct detectors shall be interlocked to the existing fire alarm system. See revised sheet M1e1C. 1628 First Avenue North • St. Petersburg, FL 33713 • 0: 727. 822.2335 • F: 727. 821.3361 • www.GrinerEngineers.com • • • Spectrum Field HVAC Replacement Permit No. BCP2017-07661 GEI Project No. 17071 August 17, 2017 Page 2 COMMENT 3: ELECTRICAL TRADE AND INSPECTIONS WILL BE REQUIRED BASED ON SCOPE ON WORK DENOTED ON DRAWINGS - PLEASE ADD ELECTRICAL TRADE TO PERMIT. Response: It is anticipated that the addition of electrical trade to permit will be addressed by City of Clearwater, Parks and Recreation .%%W'rartment. Plea04 I 1444 0.4 iuest ons. y • : o • tyo.$040 , Ac 11* S• ir-gritty, • • . T 1111\17iti „Ara fir. I....-. . ED AP t FL P.. #: 39491 D•"-' 17-17 1628 First Avenue North ♦ St. Petersburg, FL 33713 • 0: 727. 822.2335 t F: 727. 821.3361 s www.GrinerEngineers.com • 441 !!! _woo • Key Plan , St Level (Lower Level) MECHANICAL NOTES: 0 O MM IMAM MAR MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: TIM om PME M mRL CMAMM InAIL Al Mot LALESS [um ota +00, 00.0c roots moor. ta“00, orm Eco010 0:00%. sorrtt MA/M MITZ,VAL '11412.,F=tZ0 GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES: LT" IfISMI MCA SIM MOMS 10 MY OAK Tr° T•PidAr, `"°1! "Vg". HVAC SYMBOL LEGEND: owes 1.10.11,04.0/1014 OM DM= 000.0cr io Balm MO MU= O oarm 00aseau • Wm. MOM MUMMA, AI BE AMMO AM MIMEO OM. 4.4 (T.), Novelty Storage Mechanical Replacement Plan SA KALE 1/0 Partial Lower Level Mechanical Replacement Plan MALE VT • M.' AH -104 Condensate Through Wall Condensate on Exterior Wall OM MO Edsjull Dry Well DIG wmA. 17071 AUGUST 7 / Mechanical Lowe Level 1•1 '11 6,--a Partial Lower Level Mechanical Replacement Plan K7__" 7 MALE 1.4 •